0% found this document useful (0 votes)
1K views240 pages

Skoda Rapid Electrical System Eng PDF

Download as pdf or txt
Download as pdf or txt
Download as pdf or txt
You are on page 1/ 240

Service

Workshop Manual
Rapid NH 2013 ➤
Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system
Edition 02.2018

Service Department. Technical Information


Service
List of Workshop Manual Repair Groups

Repair Group
00 - Technical data
27 - Starter, current supply, CCS
90 - Gauges, instruments
91 - Radio, telephone, navigation
92 - Windscreen wash/wipe system
94 - Lights, bulbs, switches - exterior
96 - Lights, bulbs, switches - interior
97 - Wiring

Technical information should always be available to the foremen and mechanics, because their
careful and constant adherence to the instructions is essential to ensure vehicle road-worthiness and
safety. In addition, the normal basic safety precautions for working on motor vehicles must, as a
matter of course, be observed.
Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 02.2018

Contents

00 - Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
1 Safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
1.1 Safety precautions when working on vehicles with a start/stop system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
1.2 Safety precautions during road tests in which testing and measuring equipment is used . . 1
1.3 Use and safety instructions for gas discharge lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
2 Repair instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
2.1 Contact corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
2.2 Cable routing and securing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
3 Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
3.1 Warning instructions and safety precautions when working on the battery . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
3.2 Battery types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5

27 - Starter, current supply, CCS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6


1 Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
1.1 Assembly overview - battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
1.2 Summary of components - battery isolation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
1.3 Disconnecting and reconnecting battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
1.4 Checking battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
1.5 Charging battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
1.6 Removing and installing battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
1.7 Removing and installing earth lead with battery monitoring control unit J367 . . . . . . . . . . 17
1.8 Removing and installing battery isolation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
1.9 Battery parameterisation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
1.10 Removing and installing battery tray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
2 Jump start point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
2.1 Summary of components - jump start point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
2.2 Removing and installing jump start point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
3 Starter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
3.1 Assembly overview: starter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
3.2 Removing and installing starter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
3.3 Checking starter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
4 Alternator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
4.1 Removing and installing alternator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
4.2 Fixing the B+ wire to the AC generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
4.3 Checking the carbon brushes of the AC generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
4.4 Removing and installing voltage regulator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
4.5 Removing and installing V-ribbed belt pulley on alternator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
5 start-stop system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
5.1 Safety precautions for vehicles with start-stop system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
5.2 General description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
5.3 Fault recognition and fault display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
5.4 Battery recharging or starting by external source on vehicles with start-stop system . . . . 48
5.5 Replacing the battery on vehicles with “start-stop” system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
5.6 Voltage stabiliser J532 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
5.7 Battery monitor control unit J367 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
5.8 Button for start-stop system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
6 Front Assistant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
6.1 Installation location overview - Front Assistant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
6.2 Removing and installing front assistant system control unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
6.3 Removing and installing the retaining plate of the front assistant system control unit . . . . 52
6.4 Calibrating the front assistant system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54

Contents i
Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 02.2018

90 - Gauges, instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
1 Dash panel insert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
1.1 General description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
1.2 The self-diagnostic function of the dash panel insert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
1.3 Adjust/replace dash panel insert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
1.4 Removing and installing the dash panel insert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
1.5 Contact assignment of plug connection on the dash panel insert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
1.6 Warning lights in the dash panel insert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
1.7 Service interval display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
2 Cruise control system (CCS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59

91 - Radio, telephone, navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60


1 Radio - installed up to CW 21.2015 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
1.1 General Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
1.2 Electronic anti-theft coding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
1.3 Summary of components - radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
1.4 Removing and installing a radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
1.5 Plug connections on the radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
1.6 Self-diagnostic function of radio system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
2 Amundsen+ navigation system - installed up to CW 21.2015 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
2.1 General description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
2.2 General Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
2.3 Electronic anti-theft coding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
2.4 Overall view of the navigation system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
2.5 Removing and installing the navigation system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
2.6 Plug connections on the navigation system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
2.7 Aerial for GPS signal reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
2.8 Diagnosis of the navigation system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
3 Infotainment system - installed as of CW 22.2015 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
3.1 Infotainment system - general notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
3.2 Summary of components - Infotainment system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
3.3 Installation – Infotainment system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
3.4 Removing and installing the Infotainment display/control unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
3.5 Remove and install infotainment display unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
3.6 Removing and installing the infotainment control unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
3.7 Electronic anti-theft coding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
3.8 “Basic” (Blues) infotainment - initial setup, self-diagnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
4 Replacing aerials, aerial modules and aerial cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
4.1 Summary of components, Rapid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
4.2 Removing and installing roof aerial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
4.3 Removing and installing the GPS aerial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
4.4 Removing and installing the GSM aerial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
4.5 Rear or side window aerial (Spaceback) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
4.6 Panoramic roof aerial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
4.7 Aerial module R254 for rear window aerial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
4.8 Aerial module for rear left side window aerial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
4.9 Aerial module for panoramic roof aerial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
4.10 Replacing aerial cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
5 Telephone system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
5.1 Mobile phone pre-installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
5.2 Removing and installing the control unit for the mobile phone operating electronics J412
........................................................................ 92
5.3 Removing and installing the microphone for the telephone R38 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
6 Multi-functional steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94

ii Contents
Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 02.2018

6.1 Multi-functional steering wheel - general instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94


6.2 Removing and installing switch unit for operating the radio and phone/infotainment . . . . . . 94
6.3 Diagnosis of the multi-functional steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
7 Multimedia socket MEDIA-IN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
7.1 General description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
7.2 Removing and installing the control unit for multimedia system J650 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
7.3 Removing and installing connection for external audio sources R199 (AUX-IN, USB) . . . . 97
7.4 Removing and installing the rear USB charging module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
8 Loudspeaker arrangement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
8.1 Removing and installing front bass speaker and rear full-range speaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
8.2 Removing and installing the front treble speaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
9 SmartLink system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
9.1 SmartLink system - general instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
10 SmartGate system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
10.1 SmartGate system - general notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
10.2 SmartGate system - check the correct function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
10.3 Removing and installing the control unit for wireless data transfer J1070 (SmartGate) . . . . 104
10.4 Set the parameters for the WLAN connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
10.5 Update firmware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
11 Mobile services online . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
11.1 General Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
11.2 Installation location overview - mobile online services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
11.3 Removing and installing control unit for emergency call module and communication unit J949
...................................................................... 110
11.4 Removing and installing emergency call button E276 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
11.5 Removing and installing speaker for emergency call module R335 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
11.6 Replacing battery for control unit for emergency call module and communication unit J949
........................................................................ 111
11.7 Replacing, adapting and activating control unit for emergency call module and
communication unit J949 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
11.8 Checking that the components and communication of the ERA Glonass system are
functioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114

92 - Windscreen wash/wipe system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116


1 Windscreen washer system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
1.1 Removing and installing washer fluid reservoir, washer fluid pumps and sensor for washer
fluid level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
1.2 Removing and installing the spray nozzles for windscreen washer system . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
1.3 Repairing washer fluid lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
2 Windscreen wiper and washer system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
2.1 Removing and installing the wiper arms with wiper blades and setting their final setting . . 118
2.2 Removing and installing wiper motor with linkage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
2.3 Removing and installing windscreen wiper motor from linkage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
2.4 Removing and installing sensor for rain and light detection G397 , vehicles up to CW
21.2015 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
2.5 Removing and installing sensor for rain and light detection G397 , vehicles from CW
22.2015 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
2.6 Repairing sensor for rain and light detection G397 , vehicles from CW 22.2015 . . . . . . . . 125
3 Rear window wiper and washer system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
3.1 Removing and installing the wiper arm with wiper blade and setting its final setting . . . . . . 129
3.2 Removing and installing windscreen wiper motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
3.3 Replacing and adjusting the spray nozzle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
4 Headlamp cleaning system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
4.1 Removing and installing headlight cleaning system pump V11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
4.2 Removing and installing the lift cylinder for spray nozzles of headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
4.3 Bleed the headlamp cleaning system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133

Contents iii
Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 02.2018

94 - Lights, bulbs, switches - exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135


1 Headlights – halogen headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
1.1 Summary of components, halogen headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
1.2 Removing and installing headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
1.3 Replacing light bulbs in headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
1.4 Removing and installing headlight range control motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
1.5 Replace headlight fixing brackets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
1.6 Removing and installing LED module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
1.7 Change headlight for right-hand and/or left-hand traffic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
1.8 Setting the headlight beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
2 Headlights with Xenon discharge lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
2.1 Summary of components, headlights with Xenon discharge lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
2.2 Removing and installing headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
2.3 Replacing light bulbs and gas discharge lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
2.4 Replace attachment brackets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
2.5 Removing and installing headlight range control motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
2.6 Removing and installing the power output module for headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
2.7 Removing and installing LED module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
2.8 Change headlight for right-hand and/or left-hand traffic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
2.9 Setting the headlight beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
3 Side turn signal in the wing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
3.1 Removing and installing side turn signal in the wing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
4 Lights in the exterior mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
4.1 Removing and installing the turn signal light in the exterior mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
4.2 Removing and installing signal bulb in exterior mirror L131 / L132 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
5 Tail lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
5.1 Removing and installing tail light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
5.2 Replacing the light bulbs of the tail light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
6 Registration number lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
6.1 Removing and installing licence plate carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
6.2 Replacing bulb for the number plate light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
7 Additional brake light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
7.1 Removing and installing high level brake light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
8 Fog lights, fog lights with “Corner” function and daylight driving light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
8.1 General description, fault recognition and fault display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
8.2 Removing and installing fog light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
8.3 Adjusting the fog light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
8.4 Replacing light bulb for fog light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
9 Entry and start authorisation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
9.1 Installation overview - entry and start authorisation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
9.2 Install and remove interior aerial 1 for entry and start system R138 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
9.3 Install and remove aerial in luggage compartment for entry and start system R137 . . . . 175
9.4 Install and remove aerial in rear bumper for entry and start system R136 . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
9.5 Control unit for keyless entry authorisation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
9.6 Connection assignment of the connector on the control unit for keyless entry authorisation
........................................................................ 177
10 Switch unit on the steering column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
10.1 Summary of components - switch unit on the steering column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
10.2 Removing and installing steering column combination switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
10.3 Removing and installing return ring with slip ring from steering column combination switch
........................................................................ 184
10.4 Adjusting centre position for return ring with slip ring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
10.5 Removing and installing steering lock housing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
10.6 Removing and installing lock cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186

iv Contents
Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 02.2018

10.7 Removing and installing ignition/starter switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187


10.8 Contact assignment on the ignition starter switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
10.9 Removing and installing ignition key anti-removal lock solenoid N376 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
11 Parking aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
11.1 Assembly overview - parking aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
11.2 Removing and installing the parking aid control unit J446 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
11.3 Removing and installing the rear parking aid warning buzzer H15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
11.4 Removing and installing the front parking aid warning buzzer H22 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
11.5 Removing and installing rear parking aid senders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
11.6 Removing and installing front parking aid sender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
11.7 Parking aid sender holder - assignment, fitting location, gluing procedure, drilling of holes
........................................................................ 196
11.8 Self-diagnosis of the parking aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
12 Rear view camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
12.1 General description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
12.2 Summary of components - rear view camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
12.3 Removing and installing handle with rear view camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
12.4 Removing and installing the rear view camera spray nozzle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200

96 - Lights, bulbs, switches - interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201


1 Interior lights and warning light for front passenger airbag deactivation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
1.1 Removing and installing the front interior light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
1.2 Removing and installing the rear interior light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
1.3 Removing and installing the rear interior light on the left and right . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
1.4 Removing and installing glove box light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
1.5 Removing and installing the light for the storage bag in the front door trim . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
1.6 Removing and installing the front footwell light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
1.7 Removing and installing the centre console glove compartment light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
1.8 Removing and installing luggage compartment light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
1.9 Removing and installing the warning light for front passenger airbag switch-off function . . 206
2 Switches on the dash panel, in the centre console, in the doors and in the roof cover . . . . 207
2.1 Removing and installing light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
2.2 Removing and installing the headlight range control adjuster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
2.3 Removing and installing the switch for daylight driving light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
2.4 Removing and installing switches in centre console of the dash panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
2.5 Removing and installing the glove box light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
2.6 Removing and installing hazard warning lights button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
2.7 Removing and installing the mirror adjustment switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
2.8 Removing and installing the switch for the power window lifter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
2.9 Removing and installing starter button E408 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
2.10 Removing and installing the interior monitoring deactivation button as well as the towing
protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
2.11 Removing an installing the push-button for tyre pressure inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
2.12 Removing and installing the rear seat heating switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
3 Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
3.1 Removing and installing horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
4 Anti-theft warning system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
4.1 General description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
4.2 Removing and installing the horn H12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
4.3 Removing and installing interior monitoring sensor G273 and vehicle inclination sender G384
...................................................................... 216
4.4 Removing and installing the interior monitoring deactivation button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
5 12V power sockets, cigarette lighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
6 Immobiliser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
6.1 General description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218

Contents v
Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 02.2018

6.2 Immobiliser control unit J362 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219


6.3 Ignition key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
6.4 New identity when changing all the components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
6.5 System test result (online connection) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220

97 - Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
1 Fuse holder and relay carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
1.1 Removing and installing fuse holder from dash panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
1.2 Removing and installing the E-box in engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
1.3 Removing and installing relay and fuse holder behind dash panel on the driver's side . . . . 225
1.4 Removing and installing the relay of the relay carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
2 Control units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
2.1 Onboard supply control unit J519 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
2.2 Removing and installing data bus diagnostic interface J533 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
3 Vehicle diagnosis, testing and information systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
4 Wiring harness and plug repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
5 Use contact surface cleaning set VAS 6410 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232

vi Contents
Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 02.2018

00 – Technical data
1 Safety instructions
(SRL001176; Edition 02.2018)
⇒ “1.1 Safety precautions when working on vehicles with a start/
stop system”, page 1
⇒ “1.2 Safety precautions during road tests in which testing and
measuring equipment is used”, page 1
⇒ “1.3 Use and safety instructions for gas discharge lamps”, page
1

1.1 Safety precautions when working on ve‐


hicles with a start/stop system
When working on vehicles with start/stop system, please observe
the following:

Caution

Risk of injury from automatic engine start.


♦ On vehicles with activated start-stop system (recogniza‐
ble by a message in the dash panel insert) there is a risk
that the engine can start automatically.
♦ It is therefore necessary to ensure that the start-stop sys‐
tem is deactivated when carrying out work on the vehicle
(switch ignition off, if required switch ignition on again).

1.2 Safety precautions during road tests in


which testing and measuring equipment
is used
Note the following if testers and measuring instruments are used
during road tests:

WARNING

There is a risk of accident from insufficient securing of testers


and measuring instruments.
There is a hazard from the release of the passenger airbag in
the event of an accident.
• Drivers operating testing and measuring equipment while
driving can lead to an accident.
• Increased risk of accident due to unsecured test and
measuring devices.
Always secure the testing and measuring equipment with a belt
on the rear seat and have a second person operate them there.

1.3 Use and safety instructions for gas dis‐


charge lamps
All other notes and comments to this chapter can be found in the
Workshop Manual “Electrical System- General Notes” ⇒ Electri‐
cal System- General Notes; Rep. gr. 94 Chapter “94”. If a note

1. Safety instructions 1
Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 02.2018

cannot be accessed, open the Workshop Manual “Electrical Sys‐


tem - General Notes” manually in “ELSA”.

2 Rep. gr.00 - Technical data


Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 02.2018

2 Repair instructions
⇒ “2.1 Contact corrosion”, page 3
⇒ “2.2 Cable routing and securing”, page 3

2.1 Contact corrosion


The use of unsuitable connection elements (screws, nuts, wash‐
ers, etc.) causes contact corrosion.
This is why only connection elements with a special surface coat‐
ings are fitted.
Therefore, the rubber or plastic parts and the adhesives are made
from electrically non-conductive materials.
In case of doubt regarding the re-use of certain parts, the use of
new parts is recommended.

WARNING

♦ It is recommended to use only original connection material


as well as spare parts which are tested and compatible
with aluminium, see ⇒ Electronic Catalogue of Original
Parts “ETKA” .
♦ It is recommended to use only Škoda accessories.
♦ Any damage resulting from contact corrosion is not cov‐
ered by the terms of the warranty.

2.2 Cable routing and securing

Caution

Risk of damage to cables, risk of fire and failure of onboard


electrical system!
♦ To rule out mix ups and ensure the original fitting position,
mark the lines before disassembly. This includes lines for
fuel, hydraulics, underpressure, activated charcoal filter,
or electric cables. Make photos or sketches where nec‐
essary.
♦ To prevent damage to lines, sufficient clearance from all
moving or hot components must be ensured in the engine
compartment due to its cramped construction.
♦ All plug connections must be locked using catches, if nec‐
essary with special securing clips, to prevent them dis‐
connecting unintentionally. When connecting, the catches
must engage audibly; for plug connections with catch, lock
the plug connection by pushing in the catch. If necessary,
check it is locked correctly by pulling gently on the plug
connection.

Example of a connector catch with special securing clip -1-.


Primary voltage supply in the relay and fuse carrier under the
dash panel:

2. Repair instructions 3
Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 02.2018

Note

After inserting the plug up to the stop -2- to terminal 30+ on the
relay and fuse carrier -3-, secure the plug connection by pushing
the securing clip -1- in -direction of arrow- up to the stop!

4 Rep. gr.00 - Technical data


Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 02.2018

3 Battery
⇒ “3.1 Warning instructions and safety precautions when working
on the battery”, page 5
⇒ “3.2 Battery types”, page 5

3.1 Warning instructions and safety precau‐


tions when working on the battery
All the notes and comments for this chapter can be found in the
Workshop Manual ⇒ Electrical System - General notes; Rep. gr.
27 . If a note cannot be accessed, open the Workshop Manual
“Electrical System - General Notes” manually in “ELSA”, Section
“27”.

3.2 Battery types

WARNING

When working on the battery wear proper protection and ob‐


serve safety precautions (see “Electrical System - General
notes” ⇒ Electrical System - General notes; Rep. gr. 27 Sec‐
tion “27”). If a note cannot be accessed, open the Workshop
Manual “Electrical System - General Notes” manually in “EL‐
SA”.

Batteries with a magic eye and plugs covered in adhesive tape


are factory-installed in all vehicles (except vehicles with start-stop
system).
In vehicles with start/stop system, (depending on types of engines
see ⇒ Electronic Catalogue of Original Parts“ETKA” ), a fleece
battery (AGM) or a battery with magic eye with EFB technology
(Enhanced Flooded Battery) is installed.
Description of the function, test and maintenance of the previous
batteries see “Electrical System – General notes” ⇒ Electrical
System – General notes; Rep. gr. 27 . If a note cannot be ac‐
cessed, open the Workshop Manual “Electrical System - General
Notes” manually in “ELSA”.

3. Battery 5
Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 02.2018

27 – Starter, current supply, CCS


1 Battery
⇒ “1.1 Assembly overview - battery”, page 6
⇒ “1.2 Summary of components - battery isolation”, page 10
⇒ “1.3 Disconnecting and reconnecting battery”, page 10
⇒ “1.4 Checking battery”, page 13
⇒ “1.5 Charging battery”, page 13
⇒ “1.6 Removing and installing battery”, page 13
⇒ “1.7 Removing and installing earth lead with battery monitoring
control unit J367 ”, page 17
⇒ “1.8 Removing and installing battery isolation”, page 18
⇒ “1.9 Battery parameterisation”, page 19
⇒ “1.10 Removing and installing battery tray ”, page 19

WARNING

When working on the battery wear proper protection and ob‐


serve safety precautions (see ⇒ Electrical System - General
notes; Rep. gr. 27 ). If a note cannot be accessed, open the
Workshop Manual “Electrical System - General Notes” man‐
ually in “ELSA”, Chapter “27”.

1.1 Assembly overview - battery


⇒ “1.1.1 Summary of components - battery in engine compart‐
ment”, page 6
⇒ “1.1.2 Summary of components - battery in luggage compart‐
ment”, page 8

1.1.1 Summary of components - battery in engine compartment

6 Rep. gr.27 - Starter, current supply, CCS


Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 02.2018

1 - Collar
2 - Nut
❑ 6 Nm
3 - Battery-cable terminal
❑ Earth cable
❑ Disconnecting and con‐
necting the battery
⇒ “1.3 Disconnecting
and reconnecting bat‐
tery”, page 10
4 - Cap
5 - Earth cable
❑ Removing and installing
⇒ “1.7.1 Removing and
installing earth lead with
battery monitoring con‐
trol unit J367 - battery in
engine compartment”,
page 17
On vehicles with start-stop
system:
❑ with battery monitoring
control unit - J367-
❑ Battery parameterisa‐
tion
⇒ “1.9 Battery parame‐
terisation”, page 19
6 - Electrical plug connection
On vehicles with start-stop
system:
❑ Battery monitor control
unit - J367-
❑ Follow the steps for dis‐
connecting and connecting the battery ⇒ “1.3 Disconnecting and reconnecting battery”, page 10
7 - Nut
❑ 15 Nm
8 - Battery
❑ Removing and installing ⇒ “1.6 Removing and installing battery”, page 13
❑ Disconnecting and reconnecting ⇒ “1.3 Disconnecting and reconnecting battery”, page 10
❑ Check ⇒ “1.4 Checking battery”, page 13
❑ Charge ⇒ “1.5 Charging battery”, page 13
9 - Screw
❑ 15 Nm
10 - Battery carrier
❑ Removing and installing
⇒ “1.10.1 Removing and installing the battery tray in the engine compartment”, page 19
11 - Screw
❑ 20 Nm
12 - Retaining clip
13 - Water drain hose
❑ not fitted to all battery trays
❑ When installing, guide the hose without kinking it

1. Battery 7
Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 02.2018

14 - Nut
❑ 15 Nm
15 - Battery-cable terminal
❑ for plus terminal
❑ Disconnecting and connecting the battery ⇒ “1.3 Disconnecting and reconnecting battery”, page 10
16 - Plus terminal

1.1.2 Summary of components - battery in luggage compartment

1 - Retaining clip
2 - Bolts
❑ 4 pieces
❑ 18 Nm
3 - Cover
❑ for negative pole
4 - Protective collar
5 - Fuse holder A - SA-
❑ Disconnecting and re‐
connecting
⇒ “1.3 Disconnecting
and reconnecting bat‐
tery”, page 10
❑ with battery isolation
❑ Removing and installing
battery isolation
⇒ “1.8 Removing and in‐
stalling battery isola‐
tion”, page 18
6 - Screw
7 - Nut
❑ 6 Nm
8 - Earth cable
❑ with battery monitoring
control unit - J367-
❑ Disconnecting and re‐
connecting
⇒ “1.3 Disconnecting
and reconnecting bat‐
tery”, page 10
❑ Removing and installing
⇒ “1.7.2 Removing and
installing earth lead with battery monitoring control unit J367 - battery in luggage compartment”,
page 17
9 - Screw
10 - Nut
❑ 20 Nm
11 - Hose
❑ for central degassing
12 - Washer
❑ of the hose for central degassing

8 Rep. gr.27 - Starter, current supply, CCS


Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 02.2018

13 - Adjustment link
14 - Battery carrier
❑ glued into the spare wheel well
❑ Removing and installing
⇒ “1.10.2 Removing and installing the battery tray in the luggage compartment”, page 20
15 - Screw
❑ 18 Nm
16 - Bolts
❑ 3 pieces
❑ 18 Nm
17 - Battery carrier
❑ glued into the spare wheel well
18 - Battery - A-
19 - Nut
❑ 6 Nm
20 - Cover
❑ for positive pole

1. Battery 9
Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 02.2018

1.2 Summary of components - battery isolation

1 - Fuse holder A - SA-


2 - Battery isolation
3 - Nut
❑ 10 Nm
4 - Connector

1.3 Disconnecting and reconnecting battery


⇒ “1.3.1 Disconnect battery”, page 10
⇒ “1.3.2 Reconnecting battery”, page 11

1.3.1 Disconnect battery

WARNING

Observe the battery handling instructions as well as the warn‐


ing instructions and safety precautions for lead acid batteries
⇒ “3.1 Warning instructions and safety precautions when work‐
ing on the battery”, page 5 .

– Switch off all electrical components and take out the ignition
key.
Battery in engine compartment:

10 Rep. gr.27 - Starter, current supply, CCS


Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 02.2018

– Loosen nut -2- and disconnect pole terminal -4- from the neg‐
ative terminal of the battery.

Note

If both terminals are disconnected, only then disconnect pole ter‐


minal (-) from battery earth.

Battery in luggage compartment:


– Raise the luggage compartment floor and attach it to the body.

– Open the cover -3- above the negative terminal of the battery.
– Loosen nut -1- and disconnect pole terminal -2- from the neg‐
ative terminal of the battery.

1.3.2 Reconnecting battery

WARNING

Please observe the following additional instructions after work‐


ing on the airbag system or on the belt tighteners or the safety
belts:
♦ Switch on the ignition before connecting the battery.
♦ Nobody should be in the vehicle when the battery is being
connected.

1. Battery 11
Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 02.2018

Note

♦ Neither grease nor oil the battery terminals.


♦ The battery pole terminals must only be fitted by hand without
using any force in order to avoid damaging the battery hous‐
ing.
♦ Install the battery pole terminals in such a way that the battery
pole with the terminal is on the same level or protrudes.
♦ If both terminals are disconnected, only then disconnect the
battery positive pole terminal (+).
♦ After connecting the battery and switching on the ignition, the
warning light for the stability program TCS/ESP and the warn‐
ing light for the power-assisted steering remain lit. The warning
lights go out automatically after driving a few metres forward.
Thereby the steering angle sender - G85- is activated again.

Vehicles with battery monitoring control unit - J367- (with start-


stop system)
– Disconnect the plug -3- from the control unit -2- before con‐
necting to the battery.
– Fit pole terminal (-) with control unit onto the “-” pol of the bat‐
tery and tighten the fixing nut -1-.
– Fit the plug -3- again onto the control unit.
Vehicles without battery monitoring control unit - J367-

– Fit pole terminal of the earth line onto the battery negative ter‐
minal and tighten the nut -arrow-.
Continued for all vehicles:
When the battery is reconnected, perform the following opera‐
tions depending on the vehicle equipment:
♦ Set clock.
♦ Check the power windows ⇒ Maintenance ; Booklet Rapid .
♦ Code radio/navigation with anti-theft coding (not valid for radio
systems/navigation systems mounted at factory, see
⇒ “1.2 Electronic anti-theft coding”, page 60 ).
♦ Connect the ⇒ Vehicle diagnostic tester, query the event mem‐
ory and delete any event memory entries.
Tightening torques
All types of pole terminals 6 Nm

12 Rep. gr.27 - Starter, current supply, CCS


Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 02.2018

1.4 Checking battery


All the notes and comments for this chapter can be found in the
Workshop Manual ⇒ Electrical System - General notes; Rep. gr.
27 . If a note cannot be accessed, open the Workshop Manual
“Electrical System - General Notes” manually in “ELSA”, Section
“27”.

1.5 Charging battery


All the notes and comments for this chapter can be found in the
Workshop Manual ⇒ Electrical System - General notes; Rep. gr.
27 . If a note cannot be accessed, open the Workshop Manual
“Electrical System - General Notes” manually in “ELSA”, Section
“27”.

1.6 Removing and installing battery


⇒ “1.6.1 Removing and installing the battery in the engine com‐
partment”, page 13
⇒ “1.6.2 Removing and installing the battery in the luggage com‐
partment”, page 15

1.6.1 Removing and installing the battery in


the engine compartment

WARNING

Observe the battery handling instructions as well as the warn‐


ing instructions and safety precautions for lead acid batteries
⇒ “3.1 Warning instructions and safety precautions when work‐
ing on the battery”, page 5 .

Removing
– Disconnect the battery earth strap -4-
⇒ “1.3 Disconnecting and reconnecting battery”, page 10 .
– Fold open the cover -3- and slacken the nut of the positive
terminal -2-.
– Slightly press down the catches one after the other using a
screwdriver, then release by tilting the screwdriver in direction
of arrow -A- and fold the fuse box with the positive terminal
-1- to the side in direction of arrow -B-.

1. Battery 13
Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 02.2018

– Unscrew bolt -1-.


– Remove mounting bracket -2-.
– Take battery -3- out of battery tray -4-.
Installing
Installation is performed in the reverse order, pay attention to the
following points:

– Insert battery in such a way that the rear battery foot strip
catches below the pegs of the battery tray -arrows-.

14 Rep. gr.27 - Starter, current supply, CCS


Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 02.2018

– The battery is properly installed when the middle recess of the


front battery foot strip is aligned at the bottom with the bore in
the battery tray -arrows-.
– For batteries with hose for the central degassing, make sure
that the hose is not disconnected. Only then can the battery
degasify.
– For batteries without hose for the central degassing, make
sure that the opening on the battery lid is not clogged.
– Check that the battery is sitting firmly after installation.

Caution

There are certain dangers if the battery is incorrectly mounted


or mounted loosely:
♦ Shortened service life due to damage from vibration (dan‐
ger of explosion)
♦ Damage to the grid plates of the battery.
♦ Damage to battery housing by securing bracket (possibil‐
ity of acid leaking, with high consequential costs)
♦ Poor crash safety

– Lay the positive cable between the battery tray and the battery.
Tightening torques
Battery-earth strap to battery terminal 6 Nm
Positive cable to battery terminal 6 Nm
Additional cable to battery positive termi‐ 6 Nm
nal
Nuts for attaching the fuses and the con‐ 6 Nm
nection cables in the fuse box
Mounting bracket for battery 20 Nm

1.6.2 Removing and installing the battery in


the luggage compartment

WARNING

Observe the battery handling instructions as well as the warn‐


ing instructions and safety precautions for lead acid batteries
⇒ “3.1 Warning instructions and safety precautions when work‐
ing on the battery”, page 5 .

Removing
– Switch off the ignition and all electrical consumers!
– Raise the luggage compartment floor and attach it to the body.
– Remove boxes with tool kit and vehicle equipment.

1. Battery 15
Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 02.2018

– Unscrew the screws -arrows- and remove the retaining clip


-1-.

– Detach and remove cover -7- for battery negative terminal


-arrows-.
– Loosen nut -2- and disconnect pole terminal -5- from the neg‐
ative terminal of the battery.
– Remove the positive terminal cover -1-.
– Loosen nut -4- and disconnect pole terminal -3- with fuse hold‐
er from the battery positive terminal.
– Disconnect hose -6- for central degassing.
– Unscrew screw -8- and remove securing bracket -9-.
– If present, remove battery's protective cover.
– Remove battery from the luggage compartment.
Installing
Installation is performed in the reverse order, pay attention to the
following points:
– For batteries with hose for the central degassing, make sure
that the hose is not disconnected. Only then can the battery
degasify.
– Check that the battery is sitting firmly after installation.

Caution

There are certain dangers if the battery is incorrectly mounted


or mounted loosely:
♦ Shortened service life due to damage from vibration (dan‐
ger of explosion)
♦ Damage to the grid plates of the battery.
♦ Damage to battery housing by securing bracket (possibil‐
ity of acid leaking, with high consequential costs)
♦ Poor crash safety

16 Rep. gr.27 - Starter, current supply, CCS


Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 02.2018

1.7 Removing and installing earth lead with


battery monitoring control unit - J367-
⇒ “1.7.1 Removing and installing earth lead with battery monitor‐
ing control unit J367 - battery in engine compartment”,
page 17
⇒ “1.7.2 Removing and installing earth lead with battery monitor‐
ing control unit J367 - battery in luggage compartment”,
page 17

1.7.1 Removing and installing earth lead with


battery monitoring control unit - J367- -
battery in engine compartment
Removing
– Switch off all electrical components and take out the ignition
key.
– Undo nuts -1- and remove the pole terminal with the control
unit -3- from the battery-cable terminal.
– Disconnect connector -2-.

– Unscrew the nuts -2- and remove the earth cable -1- with bat‐
tery monitoring control unit - J367- .
Installing
Installation is performed in the reverse order, pay attention to the
following points:
– Follow the work procedure when connecting the battery
⇒ “1.3 Disconnecting and reconnecting battery”, page 10 .
– Adapt the battery monitoring control unit - J367-
⇒ “1.9 Battery parameterisation”, page 19 .
Tightening torques
♦ ⇒ “1.1.1 Summary of components - battery in engine com‐
partment”, page 6

1.7.2 Removing and installing earth lead with


battery monitoring control unit - J367- -
battery in luggage compartment
Removing

Note

Cable straps should be fastened again in the same place when


installing.

– Switch off all electrical components and take out the ignition
key.

1. Battery 17
Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 02.2018

– Raise the luggage compartment floor and attach it to the body.


– Remove boxes with tool kit and vehicle equipment.
– Open the cover -3- above the negative terminal of the battery.
– Loosen nut and disconnect pole terminal -6- from the negative
terminal of the battery.
– Separate electrical plug connection -7-.
– Cut cable straps -1-.
– Install earth lead -arrow-.
– Unscrew the nuts -5- and remove the earth cable -4- with bat‐
tery monitoring control unit - J367- .
Installing
Installation is performed in the reverse order, pay attention to the
following points:
– Connecting battery
⇒ “1.3 Disconnecting and reconnecting battery”, page 10 .
Tightening torques
♦ ⇒ “1.1.2 Summary of components - battery in luggage com‐
partment”, page 8

1.8 Removing and installing battery isola‐


tion

WARNING

Observe the battery handling instructions as well as the warn‐


ing instructions and safety precautions for lead acid batteries
⇒ “3.1 Warning instructions and safety precautions when work‐
ing on the battery”, page 5 .

Removing
– Switch off all electrical components and take out the ignition
key.
– Raise the luggage compartment floor and attach it to the body.
– Remove boxes with tool kit and vehicle equipment.
– Disconnect battery
⇒ “1.3 Disconnecting and reconnecting battery”, page 10
– Disconnect plug connection -2-.
– Remove nuts -1- and remove battery isolation-4- from fuse
holder A - SA- ..
Installing
Installation is performed in the reverse order, pay attention to the
following points:
– Connecting battery
⇒ “1.3 Disconnecting and reconnecting battery”, page 10 .
Tightening torques
♦ ⇒ “1.1.2 Summary of components - battery in luggage com‐
partment”, page 8
♦ ⇒ “1.2 Summary of components - battery isolation”, page 10

18 Rep. gr.27 - Starter, current supply, CCS


Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 02.2018

1.9 Battery parameterisation


It is performed on vehicles with a start-stop system when replac‐
ing the battery with a new one of another type or with higher
capacity.
After a new start battery is installed and the battery has been par‐
ameterised, the technical data of the new battery are sent to the
battery monitoring control unit - J367- .
– ⇒ Vehicle diagnostic tester connect and select the operating
mode “Targeted fault-finding”.
– Select the “Selected Functions/Components” and subse‐
quently the following menu points using the button “Skip”:
Version 1 (older model years):
♦ Body
♦ Electrical system
♦ Diagnostic capable systems
♦ Checking battery
♦ Battery monitoring function
♦ Adaption battery parameterisation
Version 2 (recent model years):
Body
Electrical system
Systems capable of diagnostics
0019 - Data bus diagnostic interface - J533-
0019 - Data bus diagnostic interface - J533- function
19 - Adapt battery

1.10 Removing and installing battery tray


⇒ “1.10.1 Removing and installing the battery tray in the engine
compartment”, page 19
⇒ “1.10.2 Removing and installing the battery tray in the luggage
compartment”, page 20

1.10.1 Removing and installing the battery tray


in the engine compartment
Removing
– Remove the battery
⇒ “1.6 Removing and installing battery”, page 13 .
– Vehicles with start-stop system - slacken and remove the cov‐
er -1-, if present, by releasing -arrows- from the battery tray
-2-.
– Vehicles with the automatic gearbox control unit fitted to the
battery tray - remove automatic gearbox control unit ⇒ Gear‐
box; Rep. gr. 37 .

1. Battery 19
Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 02.2018

– Unscrew screws -4- -3- and nuts -1-.


– Swivel air filter housing -2- slightly, raise battery tray -5- and
detach water drain hose (if present), if necessary remove tray
together with water drain hose.
Installing
Installation is carried out in the reverse order.
Tightening torques
Nut, Pos. -1- 16 Nm
Screw, Pos. -3- 10 Nm
Screw, Pos. -4- 16 Nm

1.10.2 Removing and installing the battery tray


in the luggage compartment
Special tools and workshop equipment required
♦ Separating device for glued windows - V.A.G 1474 A- or sep‐
arating device for glued windows - VAS 6452-

♦ Cutting tool - V.A.G 1351-

♦ Hand pressure gun - V.A.G 1628-

20 Rep. gr.27 - Starter, current supply, CCS


Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 02.2018

♦ Cartridge heater - V.A.G 1939-

Removing
– Remove the battery
⇒ “1.6.2 Removing and installing the battery in the luggage
compartment”, page 15 .
– Pull the cutting thread through the adhesive sealant to the in‐
side using a tool from the window adhesive set.
– Secure the end of the cutting thread with the pull handle -
V.A.G 1351/1- to prevent it being pulled out.
– Similarly guide the other end of the cutting thread through the
adhesive sealant to the inside, at the edge of the battery tray.
– Attach the mounts to the ends of the cutting thread.
– Press the cutting thread against the battery tray with the
wedge while cutting free to ensure clearance to the spare
wheel well.
– Cut out the battery tray in stages in this way.
Installing
Installation is performed in the reverse order, pay attention to the
following points:

WARNING

Do not prime the adhesive surface and do not treat with clean‐
ing solution. Keep the adhesive surfaces free of dirt or grease.
The activator must not come into contact with paintwork, oth‐
erwise there will be paint damage.
Do not prime the adhesive surface you have just cut with acti‐
vator or treat it with cleaning solution.

1. Battery 21
Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 02.2018

– Cut back the remaining material on the spare wheel well using
the U-shaped cutting knife, but do not remove completely.

Note

The remaining material serves as holding primer for the newly


applied adhesive sealing material. Keep the adhesive surfaces
free of dirt or grease.

WARNING

Exception: if the bonding is carried out later than one day after
cutting back the adhesive bead, the remaining material must
be activated with the activator.
The activator is applied evenly in one go with the applicator.
Activator must not come into contact with the paint, as this will
damage the paint.
Drying time: approx. 10 min.

– Glue on the battery tray with window pane adhesive ⇒ Elec‐


tronic Catalogue of Original Parts“ETKA”
– Install the battery
⇒ “1.6.2 Removing and installing the battery in the luggage
compartment”, page 15 .

22 Rep. gr.27 - Starter, current supply, CCS


Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 02.2018

2 Jump start point


⇒ “2.1 Summary of components - jump start point”, page 23
⇒ “2.2 Removing and installing jump start point”, page 23

2.1 Summary of components - jump start point

1 - Support
❑ for jump start point and
air filter housing
❑ Removing and installing
⇒ “2.2 Removing and in‐
stalling jump start point”,
page 23
2 - Nut
❑ 2 pieces
❑ 20 Nm
3 - Plus terminal
4 - Nut
❑ 20 Nm
5 - Cap
6 - Connecting bar
❑ for positive cables
7 - Nut
❑ 10 Nm
8 - Plus terminal
❑ to E-box
9 - Screw
❑ 10 Nm
10 - E box
11 - Side panel
12 - Earth tap
❑ 20 Nm
13 - Cover
for positive tap
Volkswagen Technical Site: http://vwts.ru http://vwts.info
14 - Positive tap
❑ 20 Nm
15 - Plus terminal
❑ To starter
16 - Screw
❑ 20 Nm

2.2 Removing and installing jump start point


Removing
– Disconnect battery
⇒ “1.3 Disconnecting and reconnecting battery”, page 10 .

2. Jump start point 23


Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 02.2018

– Remove the air filter housing ⇒ Body Work; Rep. gr. 24 .


– Release catches -arrows- and remove cover -1-.

– Unscrew and detach positive tap -6-.


– Disconnect electrical cable -7- and move clear.
– Release cap -2-.
– Unscrew nuts -1- and -5-.
– Disconnect electrical cables -3- and -4- and move clear.

– Unscrew nuts -2-.


– Unscrew bolt -3-.
– Raise mount -1- and disconnect plug connections.
– Move clear the wiring harness and take out mount -1-.
Installing
Installation is performed in the reverse order, pay attention to the
following points:
– Connecting battery
⇒ “1.3 Disconnecting and reconnecting battery”, page 10 .
Tightening torques
♦ ⇒ “2.1 Summary of components - jump start point”, page 23

24 Rep. gr.27 - Starter, current supply, CCS


Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 02.2018

3 Starter
⇒ “3.1 Assembly overview: starter”, page 25
⇒ “3.2 Removing and installing starter”, page 29
⇒ “3.3 Checking starter”, page 36

3.1 Assembly overview: starter


⇒ “3.1.1 Assembly overview - starter, vehicles with 5-speed man‐
ual gearbox MQ200-5F”, page 25
⇒ “3.1.2 Assembly overview - starter, vehicles with 5-speed man‐
ual gearbox MQ250-5F”, page 26
⇒ “3.1.3 Assembly overview - starter, vehicles with 6-speed man‐
ual gearbox 02U (MQ200-6F)”, page 27
⇒ “3.1.4 Starter, vehicles with 7-speed automatic gearbox 0CW
(DQ200-7F)”, page 28

3.1.1 Assembly overview - starter, vehicles with 5-speed manual gearbox


MQ200-5F

1 - Starter
❑ Removing and installing
⇒ “3.2.1 Removing and
installing the starter, ve‐
hicles with 5-speed
manual gearbox
(MQ200-5F)”,
page 29
❑ Check
⇒ “3.3 Checking start‐
er”, page 36
2 - Line 30/B+
3 - Nut
❑ 20 Nm
4 - Screw
❑ 2 pieces
❑ 80 Nm
5 - Protective cap
6 - Fixing nut for line holder
❑ 20 Nm

3. Starter 25
Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 02.2018

3.1.2 Assembly overview - starter, vehicles with 5-speed manual gearbox


MQ250-5F

1 - Starter
❑ Removing and installing
⇒ “3.2.2 Removing and
installing the starter, ve‐
hicles with 5-speed
manual gearbox
(MQ250-5F)”,
page 31
❑ Check
⇒ “3.3 Checking start‐
er”, page 36
2 - Screw
❑ 2 pieces
❑ 80 Nm
3 - Earth cable
❑ Depends on equipment
4 - Nut
❑ Depends on equipment
❑ 20 Nm
5 - Connector
6 - Nut
❑ 2 pieces
❑ 20 Nm
7 - Cap
8 - Line 30/B+
9 - Nut
❑ Depends on equipment
❑ 20 Nm
10 - Earth cable
❑ Depends on equipment
11 - bracket for wire harness

26 Rep. gr.27 - Starter, current supply, CCS


Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 02.2018

3.1.3 Assembly overview - starter, vehicles with 6-speed manual gearbox 02U
(MQ200-6F)

1 - Starter
❑ Removing and installing
⇒ “3.2.3 Removing and
installing the starter, ve‐
hicles with 6-speed
manual gearbox
(MQ200-6F)”,
page 33
❑ Check
⇒ “3.3 Checking start‐
er”, page 36
2 - Screw
❑ 2 pieces
❑ 80 Nm
3 - Connector
4 - Line 30/B+
5 - Nut
❑ 20 Nm
6 - Cap
7 - bracket for wire harness
8 - Nut
❑ 20 Nm

3. Starter 27
Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 02.2018

3.1.4 Starter, vehicles with 7-speed automatic gearbox 0CW (DQ200-7F)

1 - Starter
❑ Removing and installing
⇒ “3.2.4 Removing and
installing the starter - ve‐
hicles with automatic
gearbox”, page 35
❑ Check
⇒ “3.3 Checking start‐
er”, page 36
2 - Screw
❑ 80 Nm
3 - Earth cable
❑ Depends on equipment
4 - Nut
❑ Depends on equipment
❑ 20 Nm
5 - Connector
6 - Nut
❑ 20 Nm
7 - Cap
8 - Line 30/B+
9 - Screw
❑ 80 Nm

28 Rep. gr.27 - Starter, current supply, CCS


Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 02.2018

3.2 Removing and installing starter


⇒ “3.2.1 Removing and installing the starter, vehicles with 5-
speed manual gearbox (MQ200-5F)”, page 29
⇒ “3.2.2 Removing and installing the starter, vehicles with 5-
speed manual gearbox (MQ250-5F)”, page 31
⇒ “3.2.3 Removing and installing the starter, vehicles with 6-
speed manual gearbox (MQ200-6F)”, page 33
⇒ “3.2.4 Removing and installing the starter - vehicles with auto‐
matic gearbox”, page 35

3.2.1 Removing and installing the starter, ve‐


hicles with 5-speed manual gearbox
(MQ200-5F)

Note

♦ Due to the higher requirements on the starter when the start/


stop system is activated, e.g. in urban traffic/driving, its life has
been increased and the ring gear reinforced.
♦ When carrying out repairs, pay attention to the correct desig‐
nation of the spare parts (see ⇒ Electronic Catalogue of
Original Parts “ETKA” ). Components adapted to start/stop
system are not identified separately and are not or barely dif‐
ferent from normal components in their appearance.

Removing
– Disconnect battery earth strap
⇒ “1.3 Disconnecting and reconnecting battery”, page 10 .
– Engage 5th gear.
1.2 l and 1.6 MPI engine
– Remove hose -2-.
– Remove screw -1- and release retaining lugs -arrows-.
1.2 TSI engine

– Remove air exhaust -1- and hose -2-.


Continue for all engines

3. Starter 29
Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 02.2018

– Unlock and pull off connector -1-.


– Pull off the plastic cap -2-, unscrew nuts, and remove line from
terminal 30.

– Unscrew the plug -arrow-.


– Remove noise insulation ⇒ Engine; Rep. gr. 66 .

– Unscrew the nut -arrow- and remove the bracket for the ca‐
bles.

30 Rep. gr.27 - Starter, current supply, CCS


Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 02.2018

– Unscrew screw -arrow- and take out the starter by moving it


downwards.
Installing
Installation is performed in the reverse order, pay attention to the
following points:

Note

Always use a new self-locking nut to attach the earth strap and
the positive cable (see ⇒ Electronic Catalogue of Original
Parts“ETKA” ).

Caution

In an incorrect cable/cable attachment to terminal B+ can


cause cable damage, a short-circuit and a vehicle fire.
The cable to terminal B+ must be laid and attached so that it
does not come into contact with rotating or moving parts of the
assembly (e.g. with the shift mechanism, with rotating parts of
the assembly etc.)!

Tightening torques
♦ ⇒ “3.1.1 Assembly overview - starter, vehicles with 5-speed
manual gearbox MQ200-5F”, page 25

3.2.2 Removing and installing the starter, ve‐


hicles with 5-speed manual gearbox
(MQ250-5F)

Note

♦ Due to the higher requirements on the starter when the start/


stop system is activated, e.g. in urban traffic/driving, its life has
been increased and the ring gear reinforced.
♦ When carrying out repairs, pay attention to the correct desig‐
nation of the spare parts (see ⇒ Electronic Catalogue of
Original Parts “ETKA” ). Components adapted to start/stop
system are not identified separately and are not or barely dif‐
ferent from normal components in their appearance.

Removing
– Disconnect battery earth strap
⇒ “1.3 Disconnecting and reconnecting battery”, page 10 .
Vehicles with TDI engine:
– Remove air filter housing ⇒ Engine; Rep. gr. 23 .
Continued for all engines:
– Remove noise insulation ⇒ Engine; Rep. gr. 66 .

3. Starter 31
Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 02.2018

– Disconnect connector -1-.


– Remove protective cap -2-.
– Unscrew nuts -3- and remove line 30/B+.

– Unscrew nuts -1- and remove earth cable -2- (if present).

32 Rep. gr.27 - Starter, current supply, CCS


Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 02.2018

– Unscrew nuts -4- and remove bracket -1- for wiring harness.
– Unscrew bolts -2- and -5- and remove the starter -3- by moving
it downwards.
Installing
Installation is performed in the reverse order, pay attention to the
following points:

Note

Always use a new self-locking nut to attach the earth strap and
the positive cable (see ⇒ Electronic Catalogue of Original
Parts“ETKA” ).

Caution

In an incorrect cable/cable attachment to terminal B+ can


cause cable damage, a short-circuit and a vehicle fire.
The cable to terminal B+ must be laid and attached so that it
does not come into contact with rotating or moving parts of the
assembly (e.g. with the shift mechanism, with rotating parts of
the assembly etc.)!

Tightening torques
♦ ⇒ “3.1.2 Assembly overview - starter, vehicles with 5-speed
manual gearbox MQ250-5F”, page 26

3.2.3 Removing and installing the starter, ve‐


hicles with 6-speed manual gearbox
(MQ200-6F)

Note

♦ Due to the higher requirements on the starter when the start/


stop system is activated, e.g. in urban traffic/driving, its life has
been increased and the ring gear reinforced.
♦ When carrying out repairs, pay attention to the correct desig‐
nation of the spare parts (see ⇒ Electronic Catalogue of
Original Parts “ETKA” ). Components adapted to start/stop
system are not identified separately and are not or barely dif‐
ferent from normal components in their appearance.

Removing
– Disconnect battery earth strap
⇒ “1.3 Disconnecting and reconnecting battery”, page 10 .
– Remove noise insulation ⇒ Engine; Rep. gr. 66 .

3. Starter 33
Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 02.2018

– Disconnect plug connection -1-.


– Unscrew cap -2-, unscrew nuts, and remove line 30/B+.

– Unscrew top screw -arrow-.

– Unscrew nuts -arrow- from the mounting bracket for wire har‐
ness.

34 Rep. gr.27 - Starter, current supply, CCS


Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 02.2018

– Screw out bottom fixing screw -arrow- and remove the starter
by moving it downwards.
Installing
Installation is performed in the reverse order, pay attention to the
following points:

Note

Always use a new self-locking nut to attach the earth strap and
the positive cable (see ⇒ Electronic Catalogue of Original
Parts“ETKA” ).

Caution

In an incorrect cable/cable attachment to terminal B+ can


cause cable damage, a short-circuit and a vehicle fire.
The cable to terminal B+ must be laid and attached so that it
does not come into contact with rotating or moving parts of the
assembly (e.g. with the shift mechanism, with rotating parts of
the assembly etc.)!

Tightening torques
♦ ⇒ “3.1.3 Assembly overview - starter, vehicles with 6-speed
manual gearbox 02U (MQ200-6F)”, page 27

3.2.4 Removing and installing the starter - ve‐


hicles with automatic gearbox

Note

♦ Due to the higher requirements on the starter when the start/


stop system is activated, e.g. in urban traffic/driving, its life has
been increased and the ring gear reinforced.
♦ When carrying out repairs, pay attention to the correct desig‐
nation of the spare parts (see ⇒ Electronic Catalogue of
Original Parts “ETKA” ). Components adapted to start/stop
system are not identified separately and are not or barely dif‐
ferent from normal components in their appearance.

Removing
– Remove battery tray
⇒ “1.10.1 Removing and installing the battery tray in the en‐
gine compartment”, page 19 .
Vehicles with 1.4 l TDI engine:
– Remove air filter housing ⇒ Engine; Rep. gr. 23 .
Continued for all vehicles:

3. Starter 35
Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 02.2018

– Unscrew nuts -1- from the top screw and remove the earth
points -2- (if present).

– Disconnect plug connection -4-.


– Remove protective cap -5-.
– Unscrew nuts -6- and remove line 30/B+.
– Unscrew bolts -1- and -2- and remove the starter -3- by moving
it upwards.
Installing
Installation is performed in the reverse order, pay attention to the
following points:

Note

Always use a new self-locking nut to attach the earth strap and
the positive cable (see ⇒ Electronic Catalogue of Original
Parts“ETKA” ).

Caution

In an incorrect cable/cable attachment to terminal B+ can


cause cable damage, a short-circuit and a vehicle fire.
The cable to terminal B+ must be laid and attached so that it
does not come into contact with rotating or moving parts of the
assembly (e.g. with the shift mechanism, with rotating parts of
the assembly etc.)!

Tightening torques
♦ ⇒ “3.1.4 Starter, vehicles with 7-speed automatic gearbox
0CW (DQ200-7F)”, page 28

3.3 Checking starter


Check starter ⇒ Vehicle diagnostic tester.

36 Rep. gr.27 - Starter, current supply, CCS


Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 02.2018

4 Alternator
⇒ “4.1 Removing and installing alternator”, page 37
⇒ “4.2 Fixing the B+ wire to the AC generator”, page 39
⇒ “4.3 Checking the carbon brushes of the AC generator”,
page 39
⇒ “4.4 Removing and installing voltage regulator”, page 40
⇒ “4.5 Removing and installing V-ribbed belt pulley on alternator”,
page 41

4.1 Removing and installing alternator

Note

When carrying out repairs, pay attention to the correct designation


of the spare parts (see ⇒ Electronic Catalogue of Original Parts
“ETKA” ). Components adapted to start/stop system are not iden‐
tified separately and are not or barely different from normal com‐
ponents in their appearance.

Removing
– Disconnect battery earth strap
⇒ “1.3 Disconnecting and reconnecting battery”, page 10 .
– Remove the V-ribbed belt ⇒ Engine; Rep. gr. 13 .
Vehicles with 1.0/1.2/1.4 TSI and Common Rail engines:
– Remove noise insulation ⇒ Body Work; Rep. gr. 50 .
– If an air conditioning system is installed, remove the AC com‐
pressor (do not open the refrigerant circuit) and secure to the
side so that the intake hoses are not excessively strained ⇒
Heating, Air Conditioning; Rep. gr. 87 .
– 1.0/1.4;1.6 TSI-CR engine - remove bracket with tensioning
pulley ⇒ Engine; Rep. gr. 13 .
– 1.2 TSI engine - remove guide pulley ⇒ Engine; Rep. gr. 13 .
1.6 TDI-CR engine:
– Unscrew screws -2- and -3- and push charge air cooler pump
- V188- to one side.
– Remove fan shroud ⇒ Engine; Rep. gr. 19 .
All vehicles:

4. Alternator 37
Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 02.2018

– Remove the screen cap from the fixing nut of the B+ cable
-1-, unscrew the nut -2- and disconnect the electrical cable.
– Disconnect plug connection -3-.
– Unscrew the fixing nut for the cable holder, loosen the cable
retaining clip in required and put the cable to the side.

– Remove mounting screws -1- and -2- for generator -3-.


Vehicles with 1.0/1.2/1.4 TSI and Common Rail engines:
– Remove AC generator downwards.
Other vehicles:
– Remove AC generator upwards.
Installing
Installation is performed in the reverse order, pay attention to the
following points:

– For easier mounting move the threaded bushes -A- approx. 3


mm -arrows-.

Note

♦ Fix the B+ wire correctly to the AC generator


⇒ “4.2 Fixing the B+ wire to the AC generator”, page 39 .
♦ Pay attention to the work sequence when re-connecting the
battery
⇒ “1.3 Disconnecting and reconnecting battery”, page 10 .

Tightening torques
Nut for line holder 3.2 Nm
Fixing screws of the AC generator 23 Nm

38 Rep. gr.27 - Starter, current supply, CCS


Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 02.2018

4.2 Fixing the B+ wire to the AC generator

Caution

The screw connection for the B+ cable at the generator is iden‐


tified with B1+!
If the B+ cable is not tightened to the specified tightening tor‐
que, this may result in the following risks:
♦ The battery will not charge fully.
♦ Complete failure of vehicle electronics
♦ Spark formation may cause a fire
♦ Damage resulting from overvoltage on electronic compo‐
nents and control units
The cable to terminal B+ must be laid and attached so that it
does not come into contact with rotating or moving parts of the
assembly (e.g. with the shift mechanism, with rotating parts of
the assembly etc.)!
In an incorrect cable/cable attachment to terminal B+ can
cause cable damage, a short-circuit and a vehicle fire.

Note

Always use a new self-locking nut for attaching the B+ cable


-arrow-, see ⇒ Electronic Catalogue of Original Parts “ETKA” .

Tightening torques
self-locking nuts for B+ line (-arrow-) 20 Nm

4.3 Checking the carbon brushes of the AC


generator
Length of carbon brushes when new = 12 mm
Wear limit = 5 mm
Tolerance of carbon brushes to each other = +1 mm

4. Alternator 39
Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 02.2018

4.4 Removing and installing voltage regula‐


tor
⇒ “4.4.1 Removing and installing the Bosch voltage regulator”,
page 40
⇒ “4.4.2 Removing and installing the Valeo voltage regulator”,
page 40

4.4.1 Removing and installing the Bosch volt‐


age regulator
– Unscrew the fixing nuts arrows -A- and unscrew and remove
the fixing screw arrow -B- of the screen cap.
– Remove cover.

– Unscrew the fixing screws -arrows- of the voltage regulator


and remove voltage regulator.
– Installation is carried out in the reverse order.

4.4.2 Removing and installing the Valeo volt‐


age regulator
– Press off protective cap on the rear side of the generator
-arrows-.

Volkswagen Technical Site: http://vwts.ru http://vwts.info

40 Rep. gr.27 - Starter, current supply, CCS


Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 02.2018

– Release screws -1- and nut -2-.


– Remove voltage regulator.
– Installation is carried out in the reverse order.

4.5 Removing and installing V-ribbed belt


pulley on alternator
⇒ “4.5.1 Removing and installing poly V-belt pulley without free‐
wheel on alternator”, page 41
⇒ “4.5.2 Removing and installing the V-ribbed belt pulley with free
wheel, manufacturer: Bosch”, page 42
⇒ “4.5.3 Removing and installing the V-ribbed belt pulley with free
wheel, manufacturer: Valeo”, page 43
⇒ “4.5.4 Removing and installing decoupler pulley ”, page 44

4.5.1 Removing and installing poly V-belt pul‐


ley without freewheel on alternator
Special tools and workshop equipment required
♦ Socket - T30032-
Removing
– Remove alternator
⇒ “4.1 Removing and installing alternator”, page 37 .
– Clamp alternator in a vice at securing points.
– Use socket - T30032- to unscrew poly V-belt pulley securing
nut from alternator shaft.
Installing
Installation is performed in the reverse order, pay attention to the
following points:
Tightening torque
Nuts on V-ribbed belt pulley 65 Nm.

4. Alternator 41
Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 02.2018

4.5.2 Removing and installing the V-ribbed


belt pulley with free wheel, manufactur‐
er: Bosch
Special tools and workshop equipment required
♦ Polygon-head adapter - T10474-

♦ Socket drive with 8 mm hexagon socket or TORX T50


Removing
– Remove alternator
⇒ “4.1 Removing and installing alternator”, page 37 .
– Clamp alternator in a vice at securing points.
– Remove protective cap (where there is one) from poly V-belt
pulley with freewheel.
– Insert multipoint adapter - T10474- -1- into poly V-belt pulley
and fit an open-end spanner (width across flats 17 mm) to it.
– Insert hexagon socket or TORX socket -2- into alternator shaft.
– Turn generator shaft clockwise (left-handed thread) to loosen
it, counterholding it with the open-end spanner.
– Hold poly V-belt pulley with freewheel stationary with your
hand and turn alternator shaft until poly V-belt pulley with free‐
wheel can be removed.
Installing
Installation is performed in the reverse order, pay attention to the
following points:
The torque wrench must be modified for assembly of poly V-belt
with freewheel as follows:

42 Rep. gr.27 - Starter, current supply, CCS


Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 02.2018

– Release socket drive -1- and pull off grip -2-.


– Turn torque wrench grip -2- 180° and reinsert socket drive.
– Set turning direction of torque wrench to anti-clockwise at
socket drive.
– First screw V-ribbed belt pulley with freewheel onto alternator
shaft by hand as far as possible.
– Insert multipoint adapter - T10474- -1- into poly V-belt pulley
and fit an open-end spanner (width across flats 17 mm) to it.

– Insert hexagon socket or TORX socket -2- into alternator shaft.


– Turn alternator shaft anti-clockwise using the torque wrench
-3- in order to tighten poly V-belt pulley with freewheel.
Tightening torque
V-ribbed belt pulley 80 Nm.

4.5.3 Removing and installing the V-ribbed


belt pulley with free wheel, manufactur‐
er: Valeo
Special tools and workshop equipment required
♦ Polygon-head adapter - T10474-

♦ Socket drive with 8 mm hexagon socket or TORX T50


Removing
– Remove alternator
⇒ “4.1 Removing and installing alternator”, page 37 .
– Clamp alternator in a vice at securing points.
– Remove protective cap (where there is one) from poly V-belt
pulley with freewheel.

4. Alternator 43
Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 02.2018

– Insert multipoint adapter - T10474- -1- into poly V-belt pulley


and fit an open-end spanner (width across flats 17 mm) to it.
– Insert hexagon socket or TORX socket -2- into alternator shaft.
– Turn generator shaft clockwise (left-handed thread) to loosen
it, counterholding it with the open-end spanner.
– Hold poly V-belt pulley with freewheel stationary with your
hand and turn alternator shaft until the poly V-belt pulley can
be removed.
Installing
Installation is performed in the reverse order, pay attention to the
following points:
The torque wrench must be modified for assembly of poly V-belt
with freewheel as follows:

– Release socket drive -1- and pull off grip -2-.


– Turn torque wrench grip -2- 180° and reinsert socket drive.
– Set turning direction of torque wrench to anti-clockwise at
socket drive.
– First screw V-ribbed belt pulley with freewheel onto alternator
shaft by hand as far as possible.
– Insert multipoint adapter - T10474- -1- into poly V-belt pulley
and fit an open-end spanner (width across flats 17 mm) to it.

– Insert hexagon socket or TORX socket -2- into alternator shaft.


– Turn alternator shaft anti-clockwise using the torque wrench
-3- in order to tighten poly V-belt pulley with freewheel.
Tightening torque
V-ribbed belt pulley 80 Nm.

4.5.4 Removing and installing “decoupler pul‐


ley”
General description
There are different variants of the decoupler pulley.

44 Rep. gr.27 - Starter, current supply, CCS


Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 02.2018

Before removing, you must check which removal tool to use to


remove the installed decoupler pulley.

Note

♦ The length of the V-ribbed belt is different, depending on the


installed decoupler pulley with freewheel.
♦ Check the decoupler pulley with freewheel and ensure that the
correct poly V-belt is installed.
♦ For the correct poly V-belt, see the ⇒ Electronic Catalogue of
Original Parts“ETKA” .

Difference between the decouplers


A - Small decoupler pulley with freewheel – use the multipoint
adapter - T10474-
B - Large decoupler pulley with freewheel – use the multipoint
adapter - MP 1-309 (3400)-

Special tools and workshop equipment required


♦ Polygon-head adapter - T10474-
♦ Polygon-head adapter - MP 1-309 (3400)-
Removing
– Remove alternator
⇒ “4.1 Removing and installing alternator”, page 37 .
– Clamp alternator in a vice at securing points.
– Remove cap from the poly V-belt pulley.
– Insert multipoint adapter - T10474- -1- or multipoint adapter -
MP 1-309 (3400)- into poly V-belt pulley and fit an open-end
spanner (width across flats 17 mm) to it.

4. Alternator 45
Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 02.2018

– Insert hexagon socket or TORX socket -2- into alternator shaft.


– Turn generator shaft clockwise (left-handed thread) to loosen
it, counterholding it with the open-end spanner.
– Hold poly V-belt pulley stationary with your hand and turn al‐
ternator shaft until the poly V-belt pulley can be removed.
Installing
Installation is performed in the reverse order, pay attention to the
following points:
The torque wrench must be modified as follows for assembly of
the poly V-belt:

– Release socket drive -1- and pull off grip -2-.


– Turn torque wrench grip -2- 180° and reinsert socket drive.
– Set turning direction of torque wrench to anti-clockwise at
socket drive.
– First screw poly V-belt pulley onto the alternator shaft by hand
as far as possible.
– Insert multipoint adapter - T10474- or multipoint adapter - MP
1-309 (3400)- -1- into the poly V-belt pulley and fit an open-
end spanner (width across flats 17 mm) to it.

– Insert hexagon socket or TORX socket -2- into alternator shaft.


– Turn alternator shaft anti-clockwise using the torque wrench
-3- in order to tighten the poly V-belt pulley.
Tightening torque
V-ribbed belt pulley 80 Nm.

46 Rep. gr.27 - Starter, current supply, CCS


Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 02.2018

5 start-stop system
⇒ “5.1 Safety precautions for vehicles with start-stop system”,
page 47
⇒ “5.2 General description”, page 47
⇒ “5.3 Fault recognition and fault display”, page 48
⇒ “5.4 Battery recharging or starting by external source on vehi‐
cles with start-stop system”, page 48
⇒ “5.5 Replacing the battery on vehicles with start-stop system”,
page 48
⇒ “5.6 Voltage stabiliser J532 ”, page 49
⇒ “5.7 Battery monitor control unit J367 ”, page 49
⇒ “5.8 Button for start-stop system”, page 50

5.1 Safety precautions for vehicles with


start-stop system

Caution

Risk of injury from automatic engine start.


♦ On vehicles with activated start-stop system (recogniza‐
ble by a message in the dash panel insert) there is a risk
that the engine can start automatically.
♦ It is therefore necessary to ensure that the start-stop sys‐
tem is deactivated when carrying out work on the vehicle
(switch ignition off, if required switch ignition on again).

5.2 General description


The start-stop system is designed to reduce fuel consumption and
thus contributes to the reduction of pollutant emissions.
For this purpose the engine automatically switches off during
standstill phases of the vehicle and restarts automatically or when
operating the clutch pedal.
The system is always automatically activated when the ignition is
switched on and can be deactivated with the “start-stop” button in
the centre console.
Detailed description of the function as well as conditions for the
operation of the start-stop system see:
♦ ⇒ Self-study programme No. 86 ; Start-stop system in Škoda
vehicles
♦ ⇒ Operating instructions Rapid
Connection diagram of the start-stop system ⇒ Current flow dia‐
grams, Electrical fault finding and Fitting locations.

5. start-stop system 47
Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 02.2018

Note

♦ The components adapted for the start-stop system are not


specifically designated and differ only slightly from the usual
components (e.g. starter, generator).
♦ When carrying out repairs, pay attention to the correct desig‐
nation of the spare parts see ⇒ Electronic Catalogue of
Original Parts“ETKA” .

5.3 Fault recognition and fault display


The start-stop system is implemented in the software of the en‐
gine control unit - J623- as a function.
The engine control unit is equipped with self-diagnosis, which fa‐
cilitates the fault finding.
For fault finding use the ⇒ Vehicle diagnostic tester in the function
“Targeted fault finding”.

5.4 Battery recharging or starting by exter‐


nal source on vehicles with start-stop
system
When recharging or jump start on vehicles with start/stop system,
observe the following:
Do not disconnect the earth strap of the battery when recharging.
First of all connect to the positive terminals using the charge or
jump leads; then connect to the body mass (do not connect to the
negative terminal of the battery).

Note

♦ The direct charging (starting aid) of the battery at the negative


terminal results in the bypass of the battery monitoring control
unit - J367- (then the current flow is not monitored by this con‐
trol unit).
♦ The values regarding the battery state, which are stored in the
data bus diagnostic interface - J 533- (Gateway), would then
no longer correspond to the values of the charged battery.
♦ This can lead to the failure of the start-stop system.
♦ Testing and charging the battery ⇒ Electrical System – Gen‐
eral notes; Rep. gr. 27 . If a note cannot be accessed, open
the Workshop Manual “Electrical System - General Notes”
manually in “ELSA”, Section “27”.

5.5 Replacing the battery on vehicles with


“start-stop” system
AGM (Absorbent Glass Mat) batteries or batteries with a magic
eye with EFB technology (Enhanced Flooded Battery) are instal‐
led in vehicles with start-stop system.
When replacing the battery, only install a fleece battery (AGM) or
a battery with EFB technology with the same capacity (see ⇒
Electronic Catalogue of Original Parts“ETKA” ).
When replacing the battery with a new one, another type of bat‐
tery or a battery of a higher capacity you must set the battery
parameters, see ⇒ “1.9 Battery parameterisation”, page 19 .

48 Rep. gr.27 - Starter, current supply, CCS


Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 02.2018

For a description of function, testing and charging individual bat‐


teries see ⇒ Electrical System - General notes; Rep. gr. 27 . If a
note cannot be accessed, open the Workshop Manual “Electrical
System - General Notes” manually in “ELSA”, Section “27”.

5.6 Voltage stabiliser - J532-


The voltage stabilizer - J532- is located under the front passenger
seat.
Its task is to stabilise the high voltage drop of the on-board power
supply, resulting from the start-stop operation, to 12 volts.
If it becomes apparent that the electrical consumers (such as ra‐
dio/navigation, telephone, dash panel insert) must be reset at
each engine start, while operating the start-stop system, this in‐
dicates that the voltage stabilizer is defective.
If the above mentioned electrical consumers fail at the same time,
first of all check the fuse of the voltage stabilizer see ⇒ Current
flow diagrams, Electrical fault finding and Fitting locations.
A direct entry relating to a malfunction of the voltage stabilizer via
⇒ Vehicle diagnostic tester is not made at present.
Removing
– Switch off the ignition and all electrical consumers!
– Remove front passenger seat ⇒ Body Work; Rep. gr. 72 .
Rapid:
– Remove trim panel at bottom of pillar A, B and C ⇒ Body Work;
Rep. gr. 70 .
Spaceback:
– Remove trim panel at bottom of pillar A and B and the sill panel
⇒ Body Work; Rep. gr. 70 .
All vehicles:
– Lift up the carpet and the damper cover.
– Unscrew screws -arrows-.
– Disconnect the plug -2- and remove the voltage stabiliser -1-.
Installing
Installation is carried out in the reverse order.
Tightening torques
Fixing nut for stabiliser 3 Nm

5.7 Battery monitor control unit - J367-


The control unit is located directly at the negative connection ter‐
minal of the battery earth strap.
It transmits information on whether the battery has enough elec‐
tric power for the operation of the start-stop system.
It is connected to the data bus diagnostic interface - J533- (Gate‐
way) via the LIN data bus.
In the event of a failure, an entry is made in the event memory.
The start-stop system is switched off.

5. start-stop system 49
Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 02.2018

After replacing the battery monitoring control unit - J367- , perform


the adaptation (coding) with ⇒ Vehicle diagnostic tester.

5.8 Button for start-stop system


Removing and installing the button for the start-stop system
⇒ “2.11 Removing an installing the push-button for tyre pressure
inspection”, page 212 .

50 Rep. gr.27 - Starter, current supply, CCS


Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 02.2018

6 Front Assistant
⇒ “6.1 Installation location overview - Front Assistant”,
page 51
⇒ “6.2 Removing and installing front assistant system control
unit”, page 52
⇒ “6.3 Removing and installing the retaining plate of the front as‐
sistant system control unit”, page 52
⇒ “6.4 Calibrating the front assistant system”, page 54

6.1 Installation location overview - Front Assistant

1 - Dash panel insert


❑ with control unit in dash
panel insert - J285-
2 - Nut
❑ 2 pieces
❑ 8 Nm
3 - Cover
4 - Connector
5 - Control unit for clearance
control - J428-
❑ Removing and installing
⇒ “6.2 Removing and in‐
stalling front assistant
system control unit”,
page 52
❑ Calibration
⇒ “6.4 Calibrating the
front assistant system”,
page 54
6 - Holder for control unit for
clearance control - J428-
❑ On the new part, the pin
bolts -Pos. 8- are pre-
configured in the base
position
7 - Adjusting screw
❑ Adjustment bolts for
control unit for clear‐
ance control - J428-
❑ 2 pieces
8 - Retaining plate
❑ Removing and installing
⇒ “6.3 Removing and in‐
stalling the retaining plate of the front assistant system control unit”, page 52
9 - Quick-release fitting
❑ 3 pieces
❑ Replace after removal

Volkswagen Technical Site: http://vwts.ru http://vwts.info

6. Front Assistant 51
Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 02.2018

6.2 Removing and installing front assistant


system control unit

Note

When replacing the control unit for clearance control - J428- ,


connect ⇒ Vehicle diagnostic tester and, in the operating mode
“Targeted fault finding” or “Targeted functions”, select the function
“Replace relevant control unit”.

Removing
– Switch off the ignition and all electrical consumers!
– Remove control unit cover from the grid in the front bumper.
– Unscrew nuts -1- and remove the unit -2- with retaining plate
and plug -3-.

– Where necessary, remove locking lugs -arrows A-, tilt out con‐
trol unit -1- -arrow B- and push out from the holder -3-.
– Disconnect plug connection -2-.
Installing
Installation is performed in the reverse order, pay attention to the
following points:
– Calibrate the front assistant system
⇒ “6.4 Calibrating the front assistant system”, page 54 .
Tightening torques
♦ ⇒ “6.1 Installation location overview - Front Assistant”,
page 51

6.3 Removing and installing the retaining


plate of the front assistant system con‐
trol unit
Removing
– Remove clearance control control unit - J428-
⇒ “6.2 Removing and installing front assistant system control
unit”, page 52 .

52 Rep. gr.27 - Starter, current supply, CCS


Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 02.2018

– Unlock quick-release fittings -2- by rotating it -arrow-.


– Disconnect quick-release fittings -2- from the adjusting screws
-1-.
– Remove retaining plate -3- from the control unit -4-.
Installing
Installation is performed in the reverse order, pay attention to the
following points:
– Replace quick-release fittings -2-.

Note

The adjusting screws -1- in the new retaining plate are already
pre-adjusted. If necessary, correct the adjustment ⇒ page 53 .

Adjusting the adjusting screws


– Measure the adjustment dimension -a- on all adjusting screws
with a calliper gauge and adjust if necessary.
♦ Dimension -a- is 40.3 mm ± 0.5mm.

– Push new quick-release fittings -1- onto the adjusting screws


on the retaining plate -3-.
– Place the retaining plate -3- with the quick-release fittings onto
the bracket -2-.
– Secure the quick-release fittings -2- on the rear side of the
bracket -1- by turning to the stop in -direction of arrow-.
– Removing clearance control control unit - J428-
⇒ “6.2 Removing and installing front assistant system control
unit”, page 52 .
– Fit cover -5-.
– Calibrate automatic distance control
⇒ “6.4 Calibrating the front assistant system”, page 54 .

6. Front Assistant 53
Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 02.2018

6.4 Calibrating the front assistant system


Work procedure to calibrate the front assistant system ⇒ Chassis;
Rep. gr. 44 .

54 Rep. gr.27 - Starter, current supply, CCS


Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 02.2018

90 – Gauges, instruments
1 Dash panel insert
⇒ “1.1 General description ”, page 55
⇒ “1.2 The self-diagnostic function of the dash panel insert”, page
56
⇒ “1.3 Adjust/replace dash panel insert”, page 56
⇒ “1.4 Removing and installing the dash panel insert ”,
page 56
⇒ “1.5 Contact assignment of plug connection on the dash panel
insert”, page 57
⇒ “1.6 Warning lights in the dash panel insert”, page 57
⇒ “1.7 Service interval display”, page 58

1.1 General description

Note

When handling a fault it is absolutely essential to know the func‐


tions, the setting and the operation of the dash panel insert.
Detailed description of the function of the dash panel insert, the
setting and the operation ⇒ Owner's manual Rapid .

The dash panel insert is supplied in three versions:


Basic design:
The dash panel insert is only fitted with two analogue indicators
(speed and rev counter). In-between there is the central display
with the following functions:
♦ Fuel gauge
♦ Clock
♦ Total trip counter and trip counter
♦ Service intervals
used warning lights and detailed description of the function
⇒ “1.6 Warning lights in the dash panel insert”, page 57 .
Dash panel insert with multifunction display:
Compared to the basic design, this one also has a multifunction
display with onboard computer and display for automatic gearbox
(vehicles with automatic gearbox). The speed counter and the rev
counter have a silver bordering.
Dash panel insert with maxi DOT display:
In this version the dash panel insert also has an analogous cool‐
ant temperature and fuel gauge which is located in the lower part
of the rev and speed counter. The upper warning light display is
replaced by a display with total trip counter and trip counter, clock
and service intervals. In the maxi DOT display the following warn‐
ing lights are replaced by a symbol and text display:
♦ Fuel reserve
♦ Coolant temperature / deficit
♦ Oil pressure / oil level

1. Dash panel insert 55


Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 02.2018

♦ Washwater deficit
♦ Door and tailgate warning
♦ Diesel particle filter
♦ Immobiliser
♦ Brake pad wear
♦ Automatic gearbox lock

1.2 The self-diagnostic function of the dash


panel insert
The dash panel insert is controlled by a microprocessor and fea‐
tures a comprehensive self-diagnosis. If faults occur in the system
components, fault codes are stored in the event memory of the
dash panel insert.
Perform “self-diagnosis and coding” ⇒ Vehicle diagnostic tester.

1.3 Adjust/replace dash panel insert


⇒ Vehicle diagnostic tester connect on-line (network connection).
If the dash panel insert is replaced, the ⇒ Vehicle diagnostic tester
must be connected before removing the original dash panel insert
and “replace dash panel insert” must be selected in the guided
functions. Thereby the required values for the new dash panel
insert must be read into the diagnostic unit from the original dash
panel insert. If the original dash panel insert is not available or
does not communicate with the diagnostic unit, then proceed ac‐
cording to the information in the ⇒ Vehicle diagnostic tester
After installing the new dash panel insert, adapt all ignition keys
and check that the infotainment/radio is functioning.
To check infotainment/radio is functioning or perform adaptation,
see ⇒ “2.3 Electronic anti-theft coding”, page 65 (up to CW
21.2015) or ⇒ “3.7 Electronic anti-theft coding”, page 79 (from
CW 22.2015).

1.4 Removing and installing the dash panel


insert
Adjust/replace dash panel insert
⇒ Vehicle diagnostic tester connect online.
If the dash panel insert is replaced, the ⇒ Vehicle diagnostic tester
must be connected before the removal of the original dash panel
insert and must be confirmed in the “Replace control unit” Guided
Functions of the applicable control unit. Thereby, the required
values are read into the diagnostic unit from the original dash
panel insert. If the original dash panel insert is not available or
does not communicate with the diagnostic unit, then proceed ac‐
cording to the information in the ⇒ Vehicle diagnostic tester
After fitting the new dash panel insert, adapt all ignition keys.

Note

Vehicles with interface for access and start system (keyless start
authorisation) - when teaching the keys according to the instruc‐
tions in the ⇒ Vehicle diagnostic tester process.

Special tools and workshop equipment required


♦ Assembly device - T10389- or -3370-

56 Rep. gr.90 - Gauges, instruments


Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 02.2018

Removing
– Pull steering wheel out fully and lock it in its lowest position.
– Remove panel protection shield with top steering column cov‐
er -1-.

– Unscrew screws -arrows-.


– With assembly tool - T10389- or -3370- slide the panel out of
the mounting opening. When pushing out, push the panel to‐
wards the steering column.

– Press the catch -1- and disconnect the connector by tilting out
the clamp -arrow-.
Installing
Installation is performed in the reverse order, pay attention to the
following points.
Tightening torques
Fixing screws for dash panel insert 1.5 Nm

1.5 Contact assignment of plug connection


on the dash panel insert
The contact assignment of the plug connections on the dash pan‐
el insert can be found under ⇒ Current flow diagrams, Electrical
fault finding and Fitting locations.

1.6 Warning lights in the dash panel insert


Detailed description of the function of the warning lights can be
found in the ⇒ Owner's manual Rapid .

1. Dash panel insert 57


Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 02.2018

Note

♦ The dash panel insert must not be disassembled.


♦ All warning lights are designed as LEDs. The dash panel insert
must be replaced if a warning/indicator light breaks down.
♦ The assignment of the warning lights depends upon the vehi‐
cle equipment, the country and the engine versions.

1.7 Service interval display


Operation
The electronic control of the service interval display consists of:
♦ a time counter
♦ two distance counters
The electronic control evaluates the contents of the counters so
that the customer is informed after a defined period of time has
elapsed or after a defined distance has been reached by the
service interval display that a service is required (depending on
what comes first).
Reset service interval display ⇒ Maintenance ; Booklet Rapid .

58 Rep. gr.90 - Gauges, instruments


Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 02.2018

2 Cruise control system (CCS)


The engine control unit controls the function of the CC on vehicles
which have a cruise control.
Apart from the CCS control switch in the left steering-column
switch there are no additional components of the CCS.
CCS connection can be found in ⇒ Current flow diagrams, Elec‐
trical fault finding and Fitting locations.

2. Cruise control system (CCS) 59


Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 02.2018

91 – Radio, telephone, navigation


1 Radio - installed up to CW 21.2015
⇒ “1.1 General Instructions”, page 60
⇒ “1.2 Electronic anti-theft coding”, page 60
⇒ “1.3 Summary of components - radio”, page 61
⇒ “1.4 Removing and installing a radio ”, page 62
⇒ “1.5 Plug connections on the radio”, page 64
⇒ “1.6 Self-diagnostic function of radio system”, page 64

1.1 General Instructions

Note

♦ When retrofitting equipment, carrying out repair work or fault


finding ⇒ Installation Instructions for the radio and ⇒ Current
flow diagrams, Electrical fault finding and Fitting locations.
♦ Detailed assembly information, e.g. detaching and attaching
trim panels ⇒ Body Work; Rep. gr. 70 .
♦ Additional information ⇒ Operating Instruction of the radio .

1.2 Electronic anti-theft coding


The radio system is equipped with Convenience electronic anti-
theft lock, which operates in combination with the dash panel
insert.
The radio systems are protected with an anti-theft code.
For radio systems mounted at the factory the safety code is only
entered in the respective vehicle when it is initial setup. The safety
code does no longer have to be re-entered when subsequently
disconnecting and re-connecting the battery or when removing
and re-installing the radio system in the same vehicle. If the radio
system is installed in another vehicle or the dash panel insert is
replaced, the safety code must be entered again.
The radio systems in the vehicles are locked at the factory before
delivery to the dealers.
Before the vehicle is handed over to the customer, the anti-theft
code of the radio must be deactivated by entering a safety code.
The safety code can be read via the online connection with ⇒ Ve‐
hicle diagnostic tester (network connection).
The user must have a valid authorisation for the use of a pro‐
gramme to determine the radio coding.
Additional information ⇒ Operating Instruction of the radio .

60 Rep. gr.91 - Radio, telephone, navigation


Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 02.2018

Note

♦ If an incorrect safety code is entered, it can be corrected im‐


mediately at the next attempt. If an incorrect safety code is
entered once again, the radio is blocked for 1 hour.
♦ After one hour has elapsed, during which the radio as well as
the ignition must remain switched on (the time which has
elapsed since the lock was activated is shown in the display
of the radio), the procedure for deactivating the electronic anti-
theft coding can be repeated (always two attempts, then
locked for one hour).

1.3 Summary of components - radio

Note

The number and the design of the components depend on the


vehicle equipment and on the model year.

1 - Multi-functional steering
wheel
❑ Description, removing
and installing
⇒ “6 Multi-functional
steering wheel”,
page 94
2 - Radio
❑ installed in centre con‐
sole
❑ Removing and installing
⇒ “1.4 Removing and in‐
stalling a radio ”,
page 62
❑ Plug connections on the
radio
⇒ “1.5 Plug connections
on the radio”,
page 64
3 - Roof aerial
❑ AM / FM and DAB re‐
ceivers
❑ with aerial amplifier
❑ Removing and installing
⇒ “4 Replacing aerials,
aerial modules and aer‐
ial cables”, page 82
4 - Rear window aerial - R130-
❑ FM2 reception
❑ Spaceback type with
panoramic roof also
has:
♦ a panoramic roof aerial -
AM/FM receiver
♦ a side window aerial rear left - DAB receiver
❑ Removing and installing ⇒ Body Work; Rep. gr. 64

1. Radio - installed up to CW 21.2015 61


Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 02.2018

5 - Connection for external audio sources AUX-IN - R199-


❑ is independently located in the centre console next to the handbrake
– Removing and installing
⇒ “7.3 Removing and installing connection for external audio sources R199 (AUX-IN, USB) ”,
page 97
❑ Vehicles with multimedia socket (MEDIA-IN) - located under the heating/air conditioning control next to
the USB input
– Removing and installing ⇒ “7 Multimedia socket MEDIA-IN”, page 96

6 - Multimedia socket MEDIA-IN (USB, AUX-IN)


– Removing and installing ⇒ “7 Multimedia socket MEDIA-IN”, page 96

7 - Rear full-range speaker


❑ Removing and installing
⇒ “8.1 Removing and installing front bass speaker and rear full-range speaker”, page 99
8 - Front treble speaker
❑ Vehicles with manual adjustment of exterior mirrors
❑ Removing and installing
⇒ “8.2.2 Remove and install the speaker built into the internal door cover”, page 99
9 - Front bass speaker
❑ Removing and installing
⇒ “8.1 Removing and installing front bass speaker and rear full-range speaker”, page 99
10 - Front treble speaker
❑ Vehicles with electrically adjustable exterior mirrors
❑ Removing and installing
⇒ “8.2.1 Removing and installing the speaker inside the outside mirror cover”, page 99

1.4 Removing and installing a radio

Note

♦ Before removing, take out any data media in the unit ⇒ Radio
Operating Instructions .
♦ The procedure for the installation work is the same on radios
“Blues” and “Swing”.

Removing

Caution

When using the lever tool, mask points where the lever tool is
applied using commercially available adhesive tape.

– Switch off the radio, all electrical components and take out the
ignition key.

62 Rep. gr.91 - Radio, telephone, navigation


Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 02.2018

“Blues” and “Swing” radios, installed up to CW 31.2013:


– Using the removal wedge - 3409- carefully prise off the frame
-1-.

“Swing” radio installed as of CW 32.2013


– Carefully prise off top cover for radio -1- with the removal
wedge - 3409- .

Continued for all vehicles:


– Unscrew the screws -arrows- and pull the radio out of the dash
panel.

– Compress plug catch -arrows-.

1. Radio - installed up to CW 21.2015 63


Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 02.2018

– Open catch clamp -arrow- and disconnect plug.

– Radio Blues - release plug of antenna socket -arrow- and dis‐


connect.

– Radio Swing - release plug of antenna socket -arrows- and


disconnect.
Installing
Installation is performed in the reverse order, pay attention to the
following points:

Note

When pushing the radio in, do not in any circumstances press on


the display or operating buttons. The radio may be damaged.

– If the radio has been replaced, perform initial setup (see


⇒ “1.2 Electronic anti-theft coding”, page 60 ).
Tightening torques
Fixing screws for radio 1.5 Nm

1.5 Plug connections on the radio


The current pin assignment can be found in ⇒ Current flow dia‐
grams, Electrical fault finding and Fitting locations, depending on
type and model year.

1.6 Self-diagnostic function of radio system


Carry out “self-diagnosis” with the ⇒ Vehicle diagnostic tester in
the function “Targeted fault finding”.

64 Rep. gr.91 - Radio, telephone, navigation


Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 02.2018

2 Amundsen+ navigation system - in‐


stalled up to CW 21.2015
⇒ “2.1 General description”, page 65
⇒ “2.2 General Instructions”, page 65
⇒ “2.3 Electronic anti-theft coding”, page 65
⇒ “2.4 Overall view of the navigation system”, page 66
⇒ “2.5 Removing and installing the navigation system”,
page 68
⇒ “2.6 Plug connections on the navigation system”, page 69
⇒ “2.7 Aerial for GPS signal reception”, page 69
⇒ “2.8 Diagnosis of the navigation system”, page 69

2.1 General description


The navigation system Amundsen+ combines the functions of the
radio unit with the CD changer and the navigation system.
The double DIN housing of the system contains:
♦ an RDS radio
♦ Control unit for traffic information for the reception of traffic
information
♦ Colour display
♦ a navigation system with GPS satellite receiver
♦ CD drive for navigation system, audio discs playable
♦ a Bluetooth module is integrated in the navigation system
Amundsen+ which fulfils the function of the GSM II mobile
phone pre-installation (the control unit for the mobile phone
operating electronics - J412- is no longer fitted).

2.2 General Instructions

Note

♦ When retrofitting equipment, carrying out repair work or fault


finding ⇒ Current flow diagrams, Electrical fault finding and
Fitting locations and ⇒ Installation instruction for navigation
system .
♦ Detailed assembly information, e.g. detaching and attaching
trim panels ⇒ Body Work; Rep. gr. 70 .
♦ Additional information ⇒ Operating instruction of the naviga‐
tion system .

2.3 Electronic anti-theft coding


The navigation system is equipped with Convenience electronic
anti-theft lock, which operates in combination with the dash panel
insert.
The navigation system is protected against theft with a safety
code.
For navigation systems mounted at the factory, the safety code
is only entered in the respective vehicle when it is initial setup.
The safety code does no longer have to be re-entered when sub‐
sequently disconnecting and re-connecting the battery or when
removing and re-installing the navigation system in the same ve‐

2. Amundsen+ navigation system - installed up to CW 21.2015 65


Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 02.2018

hicle. If the navigation system is installed in another vehicle or the


dash panel insert is replaced, the safety code must be entered
again.
The navigation systems in the vehicles are locked at the factory
before delivery to the dealers.
Before the vehicle is handed over to the customer, the anti-theft
code of the navigation system must be deactivated by entering a
safety code.
The safety code can be read via the online connection with ⇒ Ve‐
hicle diagnostic tester (network connection).
The user must have a valid authorisation for the use of a pro‐
gramme to determine the coding of the navigation system.
Additional information ⇒ Operating instruction of the navigation
system .

Note

♦ If an incorrect safety code is entered, it can be corrected im‐


mediately at the next attempt. If an incorrect safety code is
entered once again, the navigation system is blocked for 1
hour.
♦ After one hour has elapsed, during which the navigation sys‐
tem as well as the ignition must remain switched on (the time
which has elapsed since the lock was activated is shown in
the display of the navigation system), the procedure for deac‐
tivating the electronic anti-theft coding can be repeated (al‐
ways two attempts, then locked for one hour).

2.4 Overall view of the navigation system

Note

The number and the design of the components depend on the


vehicle equipment.

66 Rep. gr.91 - Radio, telephone, navigation


Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 02.2018

1 - Aerial for GPS signal recep‐


tion
❑ Spaceback type only
❑ Removing and installing
⇒ “4.3 Removing and in‐
stalling the GPS aerial”,
page 87
2 - Multi-functional steering
wheel
❑ Description, removing
and installing
⇒ “6 Multi-functional
steering wheel”,
page 94
3 - Navigation system
❑ installed in the centre
console
❑ Removing and installing
⇒ “2.5 Removing and in‐
stalling the navigation
system”, page 68
❑ Plug connections on the
navigation system
⇒ “2.6 Plug connections
on the navigation sys‐
tem”, page 69
4 - Roof aerial
❑ for the receiver:
♦ GPS - not valid for the
Spaceback type
♦ AM/FM and DAB
♦ GSM - equipment with ERA
Glonass (Russia, Belarus)
❑ with aerial amplifier
❑ Removing and installing ⇒ “4 Replacing aerials, aerial modules and aerial cables”, page 82
5 - Rear window aerial - R130-
❑ FM2 reception
❑ Spaceback type with panoramic roof also has:
♦ a panoramic roof aerial - AM/FM receiver
♦ a side window aerial rear left - DAB receiver
❑ Removing and installing ⇒ Body Work; Rep. gr. 64
6 - Multimedia socket MEDIA-IN (USB, AUX-IN)
– Removing and installing ⇒ “7 Multimedia socket MEDIA-IN”, page 96
7 - Rear full-range speaker
❑ Removing and installing
⇒ “8.1 Removing and installing front bass speaker and rear full-range speaker”, page 99
8 - Front treble speaker
❑ Vehicles with manual adjustment of exterior mirrors
❑ Removing and installing ⇒ “8.2 Removing and installing the front treble speaker”, page 99
9 - Front bass speaker
❑ Removing and installing
⇒ “8.1 Removing and installing front bass speaker and rear full-range speaker”, page 99

2. Amundsen+ navigation system - installed up to CW 21.2015 67


Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 02.2018

10 - Front treble speaker


❑ Vehicles with electrically adjustable exterior mirrors
❑ Removing and installing ⇒ “8.2 Removing and installing the front treble speaker”, page 99

2.5 Removing and installing the navigation


system

Note

The part number for the complete navigation system is indicated


on a sticker on the housing of the navigation system.

Removing
– Switch off the radio, all electrical components and take out the
ignition key.
– Carefully unlock the cover frame -1- of the navigation menu
with the removal wedge - 3409- .

– Unscrew screws -arrows-.


– Pull the navigation system out of the dash panel.

– Compress plug catch -arrows-.

68 Rep. gr.91 - Radio, telephone, navigation


Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 02.2018

– Open catch clamp -arrow- and disconnect plug.

– Release plug of antenna socket -arrows- and disconnect.


Installing
Installation is performed in the reverse order, pay attention to the
following points:

Note

When inserting into the dash panel on no account press on the


display or on the buttons otherwise the navigation system may be
damaged.

If the navigation system was replaced:


– Enter the safety code
⇒ “2.3 Electronic anti-theft coding”, page 65 and code the nav‐
igation ⇒ Vehicle diagnostic tester.
Tightening torques
Fixing screws for navigation system 1.5 Nm

2.6 Plug connections on the navigation sys‐


tem
The current pin assignment can be found in ⇒ Current flow dia‐
grams, Electrical fault finding and Fitting locations, depending on
type and model year.

2.7 Aerial for GPS signal reception


Removing and installing
⇒ “4 Replacing aerials, aerial modules and aerial cables”,
page 82 .

2.8 Diagnosis of the navigation system


Carry out diagnosis with the ⇒ Vehicle diagnostic tester in the
function “Targeted Fault Finding”.

2. Amundsen+ navigation system - installed up to CW 21.2015 69


Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 02.2018

3 Infotainment system - installed as of


CW 22.2015
⇒ “3.1 Infotainment system - general notes”, page 70
⇒ “3.2 Summary of components - Infotainment system”,
page 70
⇒ “3.3 Installation – Infotainment system”, page 72
⇒ “3.4 Removing and installing the Infotainment display/control
unit”, page 74
⇒ “3.5 Remove and install infotainment display unit”, page 77
⇒ “3.6 Removing and installing the infotainment control unit”,
page 78
⇒ “3.7 Electronic anti-theft coding”, page 79
⇒ “3.8 Basic (Blues) infotainment - initial setup, self-diagnosis”,
page 80

3.1 Infotainment system - general notes


Infotainment system - installed as of model year 2016 (as of CW
22.2015)
♦ Infotainment system = Multimedia information system (MIB –
modular infotainment kit).
♦ It enables the driver to access the vehicle setting, assistance
systems and comfort functions via a single system.
Further information and description of function:
⇒ Operating instructions Rapid
⇒ Owner's manual – Infotainment

3.2 Summary of components - Infotainment


system

Note

The number and the design of the components depend on the


vehicle equipment and on the model year.

70 Rep. gr.91 - Radio, telephone, navigation


Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 02.2018

1 - Aerial for GPS signal recep‐


tion
On vehicles for Russia and Be‐
larus with the ERA Glonass
system and on vehicles with‐
out DAB (digital radio receiv‐
er), the GPS aerial is on the
roof (does not apply to the
Spaceback model with panor‐
amic sunroof)
❑ Removing and installing
⇒ “4.2 Removing and in‐
stalling roof aerial”,
page 85
On other vehicles, the aerial is
under the dash panel (does not
apply to vehicles for Russia
with heated windscreen)
❑ Removing and installing
⇒ “4.3 Removing and in‐
stalling the GPS aerial”,
page 87
2 - Multi-functional steering
wheel
❑ Description, removing
and installing
⇒ “6 Multi-functional
steering wheel”,
page 94
3 - Infotainment display unit
(Bolero, Amundsen)/display
and control unit (Blues, Swing)
❑ Removing and installing
(Blues, Swing equip‐
ment)
⇒ “3.4 Removing and in‐
stalling the Infotainment display/control unit”, page 74
❑ Removing and installing (Bolero, Amundsen equipment)
⇒ “3.5 Remove and install infotainment display unit”, page 77
4 - Infotainment control unit
❑ Bolero, Amundsen equipment
❑ Removing and installing ⇒ “3.6 Removing and installing the infotainment control unit”, page 78
5 - Roof aerial
❑ Depending on equipment and country version – AM/FM, DAB, GSM, GPS reception
❑ with aerial amplifier
❑ Removing and installing ⇒ “4 Replacing aerials, aerial modules and aerial cables”, page 82
6 - Rear window aerial - R130-
❑ FM2 reception
❑ Spaceback type with panoramic roof also has:
♦ a panoramic roof aerial - AM/FM receiver
♦ a side window aerial rear left - DAB receiver
❑ Removing and installing ⇒ Body Work; Rep. gr. 64
7 - Connection for external audio sources AUX-IN - R199-
❑ is independently located in the centre console next to the handbrake

3. Infotainment system - installed as of CW 22.2015 71


Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 02.2018

– Removing and installing


⇒ “7.3 Removing and installing connection for external audio sources R199 (AUX-IN, USB) ”,
page 97

8 - Multimedia socket MEDIA-IN (USB, AUX-IN)


– Removing and installing ⇒ “7 Multimedia socket MEDIA-IN”, page 96

9 - Rear full-range speaker


❑ Removing and installing
⇒ “8.1 Removing and installing front bass speaker and rear full-range speaker”, page 99
10 - Front treble speaker
❑ Vehicles with manual adjustment of exterior mirrors
❑ Removing and installing ⇒ “8.2 Removing and installing the front treble speaker”, page 99
11 - Front bass speaker
❑ Removing and installing
⇒ “8.1 Removing and installing front bass speaker and rear full-range speaker”, page 99
12 - Front treble speaker
❑ Vehicles with electrically adjustable exterior mirrors
❑ Removing and installing ⇒ “8.2 Removing and installing the front treble speaker”, page 99

3.3 Installation – Infotainment system


⇒ “3.3.1 Basic infotainment equipment BASIC ”, page 72
⇒ “3.3.2 Mid-range infotainment equipment ENTRY ”, page 73
⇒ “3.3.3 Maximum infotainment equipment STANDARD ”,
page 74

3.3.1 Basic infotainment equipment “BASIC”


“Blues” installation
Basic type:
♦ round display
♦ Radio RDS AM/FM
♦ SD card slot
♦ External media inputs – sockets AUX-IN, USB
♦ Passive CAN bus – without component protection
♦ 4 x 20 W
Optional extension:
♦ Control option via the multifunction steering wheel
Removing and installing
⇒ “3.4 Removing and installing the Infotainment display/control
unit”, page 74
⇒ “3.8 Basic (Blues) infotainment - initial setup, self-diagnosis”,
page 80

72 Rep. gr.91 - Radio, telephone, navigation


Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 02.2018

3.3.2 Mid-range infotainment equipment “EN‐


TRY”
Set “Swing”
Display and control unit form a single unit
Basic type:
♦ 5" colour touchscreen
♦ Radio RDS AM/FM
♦ SD card slot
♦ External media inputs – sockets AUX-IN, USB
♦ Vehicle comfort functions displays and settings
♦ Phone service
♦ i-Pod
Optional extension:
♦ Control option via the multifunction steering wheel
♦ DAB (digital reception – Entry Plus)
♦ Bluetooth
♦ Škoda Surround
Removing and installing
⇒ “3.4 Removing and installing the Infotainment display/control
unit”, page 74
⇒ “3.7 Electronic anti-theft coding”, page 79

3. Infotainment system - installed as of CW 22.2015 73


Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 02.2018

3.3.3 Maximum infotainment equipment


“STANDARD”
Bolero, Amundsen installation
1- Infotainment display unit
2- Infotainment control unit
Basic type:
♦ 6.5" capacitive touchscreen
♦ Radio RDS AM/FM
♦ SD card slot
♦ External media inputs – sockets AUX-IN, USB
♦ Vehicle comfort functions displays and settings
♦ Bluetooth
♦ Telephone + text message display
♦ i-Pod
♦ Mirror link
Optional extension:
♦ Control option via the multifunction steering wheel
♦ DAB (digital receiver)
♦ Škoda Surround
Amundsen
Functions such as Bolero, plus:
♦ 2 x SD card slot
♦ Navigation with 2D and 2.5D display (bird's eye view)
Removing and installing infotainment:
♦ Display units
⇒ “3.5 Remove and install infotainment display unit”,
page 77
♦ Control units
⇒ “3.6 Removing and installing the infotainment control unit”,
page 78
⇒ “3.7 Electronic anti-theft coding”, page 79

3.4 Removing and installing the Infotain‐


ment display/control unit
♦ Basic infotainment set (Blues) and Entry set (Swing)

Note

Before removing, take out any data media in the unit ⇒ Infotain‐
ment Operating Instructions .

Removing
– Switch off infotainment and all electrical components and re‐
move the ignition key.

74 Rep. gr.91 - Radio, telephone, navigation


Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 02.2018

Caution

When using the lever tool, mask points where the lever tool is
applied using commercially available adhesive tape.

– Carefully prise off top cover for infotainment -1- with the re‐
moval wedge - 3409- (start from bottom edge of the cover.
Blues:

Swing:

– Unscrew the screws -arrows- and pull the infotainment control


unit out of the dash panel.
Blues:

Swing up to CW 21/2017:

3. Infotainment system - installed as of CW 22.2015 75


Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 02.2018

Spring as of CW 22.2017:
– Insert unlocking tools into the openings in the display unit
-see fig.- until there is an audible click.
– Pull on the release tools -arrows- to remove the display unit
-1-.
All radios:

– Compress plug catch -arrows-.

– Open catch clamp -arrow- and disconnect plug.

– Blues infotainment - unlock plug of antenna socket -arrow- and


disconnect.

76 Rep. gr.91 - Radio, telephone, navigation


Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 02.2018

– Swing infotainment - unlock plug of antenna sockets


-arrows- and disconnect.
Installing
Installation is performed in the reverse order, pay attention to the
following points:

Note

When pushing the navigation system in, do not under any cir‐
cumstances press on the display or buttons. This may damage
the unit.

– If the infotainment control unit has been replaced, perform in‐


itial setup.
♦ Swing infotainment control unit
⇒ “3.7 Electronic anti-theft coding”, page 79
♦ Blues infotainment control unit
⇒ “3.8 Basic (Blues) infotainment - initial setup, self-diagno‐
sis”, page 80
Tightening torques
Fixing screw for infotainment control unit 1.5 Nm

3.5 Remove and install infotainment display


unit
♦ Standard infotainment set (Bolero and Amundsen)
Removing
– Switch off infotainment and all electrical components and re‐
move the ignition key.

Caution

When using the lever tool, mask points where the lever tool is
applied using commercially available adhesive tape.

– Carefully prise off top cover for infotainment -1- with the re‐
moval wedge - 3409- (start from bottom edge of the cover.

3. Infotainment system - installed as of CW 22.2015 77


Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 02.2018

– Unscrew screws -arrows-.


– Remove the display unit from the dash panel.
– Release connector and pull it off.
Installing
Installation is performed in the reverse order, pay attention to the
following points:

Note

When inserting into the dash panel, do not press on the display
or on the operating button, otherwise the display unit may be
damaged.

When replacing, connect the ⇒ Vehicle diagnostic tester, retrieve


the fault memory and delete if necessary.
Tightening torques
Fixing screws for display unit 1.5 Nm

3.6 Removing and installing the infotain‐


ment control unit
Special tools and workshop equipment required
♦ Extractor - T10057-
Removing
– Remove the data storage device that is still in the Infotainment
control unit ⇒ Infotainment operating manual .
– Switch off the ignition and all electrical consumers!
– Remove the storage tray from the dash panel on the front
passenger side and let it hang there considering the connec‐
ted cable lengths ⇒ Body Work - Assembly work; Rep. gr.
70 .
– Compress plug catch -arrows-.

78 Rep. gr.91 - Radio, telephone, navigation


Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 02.2018

– Open catch clamp -arrow- and disconnect plug.


– Release and pull off other plug connections.

– Unscrew bolts -3-.


– Remove bracket -4- with unit -2- from the storage tray -1-.

– Insert the release tools - T10057- into the bores of the unit,
until they click audibly into place.
– Remove unit -1- from the bracket by pulling on the release
tools arrows -arrows-.
– Loosen the release tools by pressing on the clips and remove
them from unit.
Installing
Installation is performed in the reverse order, pay attention to the
following points:
When replacing, couple the Infotainment control unit (see
⇒ “3.7 Electronic anti-theft coding”, page 79 ).
Tightening torques
Tighten the screws -3- for attaching the 1.5 Nm
infotainment control unit

3.7 Electronic anti-theft coding

Note

The following does not apply to the “Basic” (Blues) infotainment


equipment.

3. Infotainment system - installed as of CW 22.2015 79


Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 02.2018

The Infotainment display/control unit is equipped with an elec‐


tronic comfort anti-theft coding, which operates in combination
with the dash panel insert.
The Infotainment display/control unit must be coupled with an ap‐
propriate vehicle using the ⇒ Vehicle diagnostic tester. The se‐
curity code is no longer entered.
The Infotainment display/control unit, which is installed at the fac‐
tory, is coupled only when it is used for the first time with the
corresponding vehicle. If the battery is disconnected and then re‐
connected or if the Infotainment display/control unit is removed
from a vehicle and then re-installed in the same vehicle, coupling
with the corresponding vehicle is no longer valid.
If the dash panel insert is replaced, the Infotainment display/con‐
trol unit must be coupled with the relevant vehicle once again.
The user must have a valid authorisation to use a programme for
coupling the Infotainment display/control unit.
Additional information ⇒ Infotainment operating manual .

3.8 “Basic” (Blues) infotainment - initial set‐


up, self-diagnosis
Valid for Blues radio installed as of CW 22.2015.
1. Commissioning
Phase 1A:
– If the unit is in transport mode (it has never been switched on),
press the button to switch the unit on (on/off).
Result of phase 1A:
The unit switches to “select number of speakers” mode (2-4
speakers).
Phase 1B:
– If the unit has already been switched on, press the button to
switch on the unit (on/off) and then briefly press the RADIO ,
SETUP and EXTRAS buttons simultaneously.

Result of phase 1B:


The unit switches to “select number of speakers” mode (2-4
speakers).
Phase 2:
– To select the number of speakers installed in the vehicle, press
the ◄ button (only front speakers, x2 bass + x2 treble loud‐
speakers) or the ► button (x2 bass at front + x2 treble loud‐
speaker and x2 wide band loudspeakers at rear).

Note

The number of installs loudspeakers can be determined from the


vehicle identification number (VIN code) in the ELSA vehicle data.

Result of phase 2:
“Diagnosis OK” or “Not OK” is displayed on the unit's display.
Diagnosis OK:
Activation has been successful and the unit can be operated by
pressing the ► button or after a time limit (approx. 10 sec) for
station tuning, see ⇒ BASIC infotainment operating instructions .

80 Rep. gr.91 - Radio, telephone, navigation


Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 02.2018

Not OK:
To be operated, all the system components must be connected
to the unit.
If the unit identifies that one of the components listed below is not
connected, “Not OK” and the abbreviation for the component that
the unit has not recognised is shown on the display (max. eight
components, depending on equipment):
LF - Front left speaker
RF - Front right speaker
LR - Rear left speaker
RR - Rear right speaker
A1 - Primary aerial
A2 - Secondary aerial
USB - USB connection
AUX - Connection for external audio sources (AUX)
The unit is then switched off by pressing the ► button or after a
period of time (approx. 10 sec).
Once the indicated components have been connected, repeat the
procedure from phase 1B.
2. Service mode
For information only:
Phase 1:
– Press the button to turn on the unit (on/off).
Phase 2:
– Press the SETUP button for approximately 5 seconds.
In service mode, you can navigate by using the ◄ and ► buttons
to view three items of information.
Part NO - Number of the unit
HW - Hardware
SW - Software

3. Infotainment system - installed as of CW 22.2015 81


Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 02.2018

4 Replacing aerials, aerial modules


and aerial cables
⇒ “4.1 Summary of components, Rapid”, page 82
⇒ “4.2 Removing and installing roof aerial”, page 85
⇒ “4.3 Removing and installing the GPS aerial”, page 87
⇒ “4.4 Removing and installing the GSM aerial”, page 88
⇒ “4.5 Rear or side window aerial (Spaceback)”, page 89
⇒ “4.6 Panoramic roof aerial”, page 89
⇒ “4.7 Aerial module R254 for rear window aerial”, page 89
⇒ “4.8 Aerial module for rear left side window aerial”, page 90
⇒ “4.9 Aerial module for panoramic roof aerial”, page 90
⇒ “4.10 Replacing aerial cables”, page 91

4.1 Summary of components, Rapid


⇒ “4.1.1 Summary of components - antennas, Rapid”,
page 82
⇒ “4.1.2 Overview of components - Antennas, Spaceback”, page
84

4.1.1 Summary of components - antennas, Rapid

82 Rep. gr.91 - Radio, telephone, navigation


Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 02.2018

1 - GPS aerial - R50-


On vehicles for Russia and Be‐
larus with the ERA Glonass
system and on vehicles with‐
out DAB (digital radio receiv‐
er), the GPS aerial is on the
roof

On other vehicles, the aerial is


under the dash panel (does not
apply to vehicles for Russia
with heated windscreen)
❑ Removing and installing
⇒ “4.3 Removing and in‐
stalling the GPS aerial”,
page 87
2 - Rear window antenna 1 -
R130-
❑ FM2 reception
❑ Removing and installing
⇒ Body Work; Rep. gr.
64
3 - Roof aerial - R216-
❑ Depending on equip‐
ment and country ver‐
sion – AM/FM, DAB,
GSM, GPS reception
❑ with aerial amplifier
❑ Removing and installing
⇒ “4.2 Removing and in‐
stalling roof aerial”,
page 85
4 - Aerial module - R254- for
rear window aerial
❑ Removing and installing
⇒ “4.7 Aerial module
R254 for rear window aerial”, page 89

4. Replacing aerials, aerial modules and aerial cables 83


Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 02.2018

4.1.2 Overview of components - Antennas, Spaceback

1 - GPS aerial - R50-


On vehicles for Russia and Be‐
larus with the ERA Glonass
system and on vehicles with‐
out DAB (digital radio receiv‐
er), the GPS aerial is on the
roof (does not apply to vehicles
with panoramic sunroof)

On other vehicles, the aerial is


under the dash panel (does not
apply to vehicles for Russia
with heated windscreen)
❑ Removing and installing
⇒ “4.3 Removing and in‐
stalling the GPS aerial”,
page 87
2 - Antenna module - R11- in‐
tegrated in the panoramic roof
❑ Applies to vehicles with
a panoramic roof
❑ Removing and installing
⇒ Body Work; Rep. gr.
64
3 - Antenna module - R108- for
panoramic roof aerial
❑ Removing and installing
⇒ “4.9 Aerial module for
panoramic roof aerial”,
page 90
4 - Roof aerial - R216-
❑ Depending on equip‐
ment and country ver‐
sion – AM/FM, DAB,
GSM, GPS reception
❑ with aerial amplifier
❑ Removing and installing ⇒ “4.2 Removing and installing roof aerial”, page 85
5 - Aerial module - R254- for rear window aerial
❑ Removing and installing ⇒ “4.7 Aerial module R254 for rear window aerial”, page 89
6 - Rear window antenna 1 - R130-
❑ FM2 reception
❑ Removing and installing ⇒ Body Work; Rep. gr. 64
7 - Digital radio antenna - R183-
❑ in the left side window
8 - Left aerial module - R108-
❑ Removing and installing ⇒ “4.8 Aerial module for rear left side window aerial”, page 90

84 Rep. gr.91 - Radio, telephone, navigation


Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 02.2018

4.2 Removing and installing roof aerial


⇒ “4.2.1 Removing and installing the roof aerial for radio up to CW
21.2015”, page 85
⇒ “4.2.2 Removing and installing the roof aerial for radio and nav‐
igation up to CW 21.2015”, page 86
⇒ “4.2.3 Removing and installing the roof aerial as of CW
22.2015”, page 87

4.2.1 Removing and installing the roof aerial for radio up to CW 21.2015

Note

Before installing the radio aerial, switch off all electrical consumers and take out the ignition key.

1 - Aerial rod
2 - Aerial base with integrated
amplifier
❑ to remove and install:
♦ Detach the moulded head‐
liner up to the A-pillars and
carefully unhook the rear
section downwards. For ve‐
hicles with panoramic sun‐
roof, lower the moulded
headliner completely ⇒
Body Work; Rep. gr. 70 .
3 - Connection for the antenna
cable going to the radio
4 - Hexagon nut with serrated
washer
❑ 6 Nm
❑ hexagonal nut is con‐
nected to serrated
washer by a plastic ring
❑ apply contact grease on
the inside of roof in the
area of the serrated
washer
5 - Roof

4. Replacing aerials, aerial modules and aerial cables 85


Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 02.2018

4.2.2 Removing and installing the roof aerial


for radio and navigation up to CW
21.2015

Note

♦ The number of connections of the aerial base depends on the


vehicle equipment.
♦ Before installing the radio aerial, switch off all electrical con‐
sumers and take out the ignition key.

1 - Aerial rod
❑ can be removed
2 - Aerial base with integrated
amplifier
❑ to remove and install:
♦ Detach the moulded head‐
liner up to the A-pillars and
carefully unhook the rear
section downwards. For ve‐
hicles with panoramic sun‐
roof, lower the moulded
headliner completely ⇒
Body Work; Rep. gr. 70 .
3 - Hexagon nut with serrated
washer
❑ 6 Nm
❑ hexagonal nut is con‐
nected to serrated
washer by a plastic ring
❑ apply contact grease on
the inside of roof in the
area of the serrated
washer
4 - Aerial cable to radio
❑ White plug
5 - Aerial cable to telephone
❑ Lilac plug
❑ not assigned
6 - Aerial cable to navigation
❑ Blue plug
7 - Aerial cable to radio
❑ black plug
❑ Reception of digital programme

86 Rep. gr.91 - Radio, telephone, navigation


Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 02.2018

4.2.3 Removing and installing the roof aerial


as of CW 22.2015

Note

♦ The number of connections of the aerial base depends on the


vehicle equipment.
♦ Before installing the radio aerial, switch off all electrical con‐
sumers and take out the ignition key.

Removing
– Detach the moulded headliner up to the A-pillars and carefully
unhook the rear section downwards. For vehicles with panor‐
amic sunroof, lower the moulded headliner completely ⇒ Body
Work; Rep. gr. 70 .
– Release and pull off the connector -1- on the aerial cables.
– Unscrew bolt -3-.
– Open holding clamp -2- and remove the aerial.
Installing
– Put aerial in position and press down the holding clamp -2-
until it clicks into place.
– Tighten fixing screw.
– Further installation occurs in reverse order.
Tightening torques
Fixing screw for aerial, Pos. -3- 6 Nm

4.3 Removing and installing the GPS aerial

Note

♦ Apples to the Spaceback model and all vehicles equipped with


navigation system from CW 22/2015, except vehicles with the
ERA Glonass system (Russia and Belarus – GPS aerial on the
roof, except the Spaceback model with panoramic sunroof).
♦ The GPS aerial is located on the dash panel cross member
behind the dash panel insert.

Removing
– Removing the dash panel ⇒ Body Work; Rep. gr. 70 .
Version 1:
– Push aerial -1- from underneath off the mount on the dash
panel cross member -arrow-.

4. Replacing aerials, aerial modules and aerial cables 87


Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 02.2018

– When pressing out the aerial, press the retaining tabs


-arrows-.
– Unlock and remove the aerial connection.

Version 2:
– Release and remove the GPS aerial -2- with bracket -1- out of
the retaining tab -arrows-.

– Release GPS aerial -1- from the retaining tabs, arrows -A- and
-B- and take out of the bracket -2-.
– Unlock and remove the aerial connection.
Installing
Installation is performed in the reverse order, pay attention to the
following points:
– The aerial lug/bracket, see illustration, locks the correct posi‐
tion.

4.4 Removing and installing the GSM aerial

Note

Applies to the Spaceback model; on the Sedan model, the GSM


aerial is on the roof.

The GSM aerial is located on the bracket of the control unit for
emergency call module and communication unit - J949- behind
the dash panel on the driver's side.
– Switch off the ignition and all electrical consumers!
– Place the ignition key outside the vehicle to avoid accidentally
turning on the ignition.
– Remove the side vent from the dash panel on the driver's side
⇒ Heating, Air Conditioning; Rep. gr. 80 .

88 Rep. gr.91 - Radio, telephone, navigation


Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 02.2018

– Remove the side cover on the dash panel -1- on the driver's
side in -direction of arrow-.
– Remove the light switch
⇒ “2.1 Removing and installing light switch”, page 207 and the
headlight range control adjuster
⇒ “2.2 Removing and installing the headlight range control ad‐
juster”, page 207 .

– Push off the retaining tab in direction of arrow -A- and then
slide the aerial -1- out of the bracket -2- in direction of arrow
-B-.
– Unlock and remove the aerial connection.
Installing
Installation is carried out in the reverse order.

4.5 Rear or side window aerial (Spaceback)


The aerial cannot be replaced separately, in the event of a fault,
the rear- side window must be replaced ⇒ Body Work; Rep. gr.
64 .
There are frequency filters for the frequency modulation on the
supply cables for the rear window heating, which are component
parts of the wiring harness and can not be replaced separately.

4.6 Panoramic roof aerial


The aerial cannot be replaced separately, in the event of a fault,
the panoramic roof must be replaced ⇒ Body Work; Rep. gr. 64 .

4.7 Aerial module - R254- for rear window


aerial
Located next to the rear window wiper motor.
Removing
– Remove the cover for the rear wiper motor.

4. Replacing aerials, aerial modules and aerial cables 89


Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 02.2018

– Unlock and disconnect connectors -1- and -2-.


– Unscrew the screw -3-, but not fully.
– Undo screw with clip -3- out of the bearing, move aerial module
-4- -arrow- and remove.
Installing
Installation is performed in the reverse order, pay attention to the
following points:
Tightening torques
Fixing screw for aerial module, Pos. -3- 2 Nm

4.8 Aerial module for rear left side window


aerial
For Spaceback type only.
Removing
– Switch off the ignition and all electrical consumers!
– Remove top left C pillar trim panel ⇒ Body Work; Rep. gr. 70 .
– Unlock and disconnect connectors -1- and -3-.
– Unscrew the screw -4-, but not fully.
– Remove the screw and clip -4- from the mounting in direction
of arrow -A-; slide out and remove the aerial module -2- in
direction of arrow -B-.
Installing
Installation is performed in the reverse order, pay attention to the
following points:
Tightening torques
Fixing screw for aerial module, Pos. -4- 2 Nm

4.9 Aerial module for panoramic roof aerial


The aerial is located underneath the rear left headlining.
Removing
– Switch off the ignition and all electrical consumers!
– Unhook headlining ⇒ Body Work; Rep. gr. 70 .
– Unlock and disconnect connectors -3- and -4-.
– Unscrew the screw -2-, but not fully.
– Remove the screw and clip -2- from the mounting in direction
of arrow -A-; slide out and remove the aerial module -1- in
direction of arrow -B-.
Installing
Installation is performed in the reverse order, pay attention to the
following points:
Tightening torques
Fixing screw for aerial module, Pos. -2- 2 Nm

90 Rep. gr.91 - Radio, telephone, navigation


Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 02.2018

4.10 Replacing aerial cables

Note

♦ Aerial cables cannot be repaired Replace damaged aerial ca‐


bles with a new original part, see ⇒ Electronic Catalogue of
Original Parts“ETKA” ; Accessories; sub-group 35.
♦ Do not crimp aerial cable or bend excessively! The minimum
bending radius must not be less than 50 mm.

– Cut off aerial connection from the defective cable.


The remainder of the defective cable remains in the vehicle.
– Lay new aerial cable close to the original cable and attach.
– Perform a functional test.

4. Replacing aerials, aerial modules and aerial cables 91


Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 02.2018

5 Telephone system
⇒ “5.1 Mobile phone pre-installation”, page 92
⇒ “5.2 Removing and installing the control unit for the mobile
phone operating electronics J412 ”, page 92
⇒ “5.3 Removing and installing the microphone for the telephone
R38 ”, page 93

5.1 Mobile phone pre-installation


Further information and description of function:
♦ ⇒ Operating instructions Rapid
♦ ⇒ Self-study programme No. 81 ; Bluetooth in Škoda vehicles
Mobile phone pre-installation (universal)
Valid for vehicles manufactured up to CW 21.2015
1- Radio
2- Door speakers
3- Voltage supply for telephone system
4- Microphone for the telephone - R38- , in the interior light
5- 54-pin connector on the control unit for the mobile phone
operating electronics - J412- (transmission/receiver unit)
6- Control unit for mobile phone operating electronics - J412-
(transmission/receiver unit)

Mobile phone pre-installation (universal) on vehicles with the


Amundsen+ navigation system and vehicles with mobile phone
pre-installation manufactured as of CW 22.2015

Note

A Bluetooth module is integrated in the navigation system Amund‐


sen+ which fulfils the function of the GSM II mobile phone pre-
installation (the control unit for the mobile phone operating
electronics - J412- that is located under the right front seat is no
longer fitted)

1- Navigation system/infotainment
2- Door speakers
3- Microphone for the telephone - R38- , in the interior light

5.2 Removing and installing the control unit


for the mobile phone operating electron‐
ics - J412-
Installed up to CW 21.2015. As of CW 22.2015, mobile phone pre-
installation is integrated into the infotainment control unit (see
⇒ “3.3 Installation – Infotainment system”, page 72 ).
The control unit is located below the right front seat under the floor
covering.
Removing
– Switch off the ignition and all electrical consumers!
– Remove front passenger seat ⇒ Body Work; Rep. gr. 72 .

92 Rep. gr.91 - Radio, telephone, navigation


Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 02.2018

– Remove trim panel at bottom of pillar A and B ⇒ Body Work;


Rep. gr. 70 .
– Raise floor covering.
– Unlock by tilting out the clamp and disconnect the plug con‐
nection.
– Unscrew the nuts -arrows-.
– Remove control unit -1-.
Installing
Installation is performed in the reverse order, pay attention to the
following points:
– When replacing, code the new control unit after the installation
⇒ Vehicle diagnostic tester.
Tightening torques
Fixing nuts for control unit for the mobile 2 Nm
phone operating electronics - J412-

5.3 Removing and installing the microphone


for the telephone - R38-
The microphone is located in the interior light.
Removing
– Switch off the ignition and all electrical consumers!
– Remove interior light
⇒ “1.1 Removing and installing the front interior light”,
page 201 .
– Disconnect the plug connection -1- and release the micro‐
phone -2- from the catches in the interior light.
Installing
Installation is carried out in the reverse order.

5. Telephone system 93
Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 02.2018

6 Multi-functional steering wheel


⇒ “6.1 Multi-functional steering wheel - general instructions”, page
94
⇒ “6.2 Removing and installing switch unit for operating the radio
and phone/infotainment”, page 94
⇒ “6.3 Diagnosis of the multi-functional steering wheel”,
page 95

6.1 Multi-functional steering wheel - general


instructions

Note

♦ When handling a fault, it is absolutely essential to know the


function and operation of the multi-functional steering wheel.
♦ Additional information and description of function ⇒ Owner's
manual Rapid .

The multi-functional steering wheel contains (depending upon


equipment) the following components:
♦ Multifunction buttons in the steering wheel on the left - E440-
and right -E441- for the operation of the Infotainment
♦ Multifunctional steering wheel control unit - J453- , integrated
in the left front switch unit
The multi-functional steering wheel control unit - J453- commu‐
nicates via the LIN databus with the vehicle voltage control unit -
J519- .

6.2 Removing and installing switch unit for


operating the radio and phone/infotain‐
ment
The assembly work is identical for both switch units.
Removing

Caution

When using the lever tool, mask points where the lever tool is
applied using commercially available adhesive tape.

– Disconnect battery earth strap


⇒ “1.3 Disconnecting and reconnecting battery”, page 10 .
– Remove the airbag unit in the steering wheel ⇒ Body Work;
Rep. gr. 69 .
– Disconnect plug.

94 Rep. gr.91 - Radio, telephone, navigation


Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 02.2018

– Carefully lever the plate with switch units -2- out of the steering
wheel -1- using the removal wedge - 3409- -arrows-.
– Disconnect plug.

– Unscrew bolts -3-.


– When removing the units -1- and -2-, carefully detach the con‐
necting cable from the bearing -arrows-.
Installing
Installation is performed in the reverse order, pay attention to the
following points:

Note

♦ Route connection cable for modules correctly in the line in the


plate -arrows-.
♦ Before the airbag is installed, it must be checked if all the wiring
is properly pressed back into the guiding grooves in the steer‐
ing wheel foam. Wiring which protrudes can be damaged by
the backside parts of the airbag.
♦ Follow the work procedure when connecting the battery
⇒ “1.3 Disconnecting and reconnecting battery”, page 10 .

– If the switch unit has been replaced by an integrated control


unit, coding must be performed with ⇒ Vehicle diagnostic test‐
er.
Tightening torques
Mounting screws for switch unit 0.4 Nm

6.3 Diagnosis of the multi-functional steer‐


ing wheel
The multi-functional steering wheel is capable of conducting a
self-diagnosis. Carry out “self-diagnosis” with the ⇒ Vehicle diag‐
nostic tester in the function “Targeted fault finding”.

6. Multi-functional steering wheel 95


Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 02.2018

7 Multimedia socket MEDIA-IN


⇒ “7.1 General description”, page 96
⇒ “7.2 Removing and installing the control unit for multimedia
system J650 ”, page 96
⇒ “7.3 Removing and installing connection for external audio
sources R199 (AUX-IN, USB) ”, page 97
⇒ “7.4 Removing and installing the rear USB charging module”,
page 98

7.1 General description


This is designed to connect the audio signal from the external
stereo systems and to play back music from these systems via
the radio/navigation installed ex works.
The MEDIA-IN multimedia socket includes the AUX-IN and (de‐
pending on equipment) USB inputs.
Until CW 21.2015, the control unit for multimedia system - J650-
is part of the MEDIA-IN multimedia socket; thereafter, it is no
longer installed.
Description of function ⇒ Operating instructions of the radio/nav‐
igation/infotainment system .
Contact assignment of plug connection and current flow diagram
⇒ Current flow diagrams, Electrical fault finding and Fitting loca‐
tions.

7.2 Removing and installing the control unit


for multimedia system - J650-
Installed up to CW 21.2015.
The control unit for multimedia system - J650- is located below
the glove compartment/front passenger's side.
Removing
– Switch off the ignition and all electrical consumers!
– Remove the storage compartment in the dash panel on the
front passenger side ⇒ Body Work; Rep. gr. 70 .
– Disconnect plug connection -4-.
– Unscrew screw -1- and release the unit with the bracket -3-
from the retaining tabs -arrows-.
– Disconnect plug connection -2-.
– Remove the unit with the bracket from the vehicle or push it
out of the bracket.
Installing
Installation is performed in the reverse order, pay attention to the
following points:
– When replacing the control unit, it must be checked or coded
with ⇒ Vehicle diagnostic tester
Tightening torques
Fixing screws for control unit for multime‐ 4 Nm
dia system - J650-

96 Rep. gr.91 - Radio, telephone, navigation


Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 02.2018

7.3 Removing and installing connection for


external audio sources - R199- (AUX-
IN, USB)
⇒ “7.3.1 Removing and installing connection for external audio
sources R199 (AUX-IN, USB) under the heating”, page 97
⇒ “7.3.2 Removing and installing the connection for external audio
sources R199 (AUX-IN) in centre console next to the handbrake”,
page 98

7.3.1 Removing and installing connection for


external audio sources - R199- (AUX-
IN, USB) under the heating
Removing
– Switch off the ignition and all electrical consumers!
Vehicles up to CW 21.2015:
– Remove the storage compartment in the dash panel on the
front passenger side ⇒ Body Work; Rep. gr. 70 .
– Disconnect plug -2- from control unit for multimedia system -
J650- .
All vehicles:

Caution

When using the lever tool, mask points where the lever tool is
applied using commercially available adhesive tape.

– Lever off the cover -1- using the disassembly wedge - 3409-
-arrow-.

– Release the MEDIA-IN multimedia socket (USB and AUX-IN)


-2- from the retaining tabs and push it out -arrow-.
– Disconnect plug connection -1-.

7. Multimedia socket MEDIA-IN 97


Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 02.2018

7.3.2 Removing and installing the connection


for external audio sources - R199-
(AUX-IN) in centre console next to the
handbrake
Removing
– Switch off the radio, all electrical components and take out the
ignition key.
– Remove the centre console between driver and front passen‐
ger ⇒ Body Work; Rep. gr. 68 .
– Disconnect plug.
– Press together the retaining tabs -arrows- and push connec‐
tion for external audio sources -1- out of the centre console
-2-.
Installing
Installation is carried out in the reverse order.

7.4 Removing and installing the rear USB


charging module
Removing
– Disassemble the panel with USB connectors -1- with the dis‐
assembly wedge from the rear support in the center console
-arrows-.

– Detach USB charging module -1- from the panel detents ar‐
rows -A- -2- in the direction of the arrow -B-
Installing
Installation is carried out in the reverse order.

98 Rep. gr.91 - Radio, telephone, navigation


Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 02.2018

8 Loudspeaker arrangement
⇒ “8.1 Removing and installing front bass speaker and rear full-
range speaker”, page 99
⇒ “8.2 Removing and installing the front treble speaker”,
page 99

8.1 Removing and installing front bass


speaker and rear full-range speaker
Removing
– Switch off the ignition and all electrical consumers!
– Remove the door trim panel from which the loudspeaker is
removed ⇒ Body Work; Rep. gr. 70 .
– Disconnect socket connector at the loudspeaker.
– Use a suitable drill to drill open the rivets -arrows- and take out
the faulty speaker.

Note

♦ It is important to remove all the drill swarf from the door since
it can otherwise lead to corrosion.
♦ Any damage to the paintwork which is caused by drilling out
the rivets must be repaired immediately by a specialist.

Installing
Installation is carried out in the reverse order.
– Attach the new speaker with matching blind rivets.

8.2 Removing and installing the front treble


speaker
⇒ “8.2.1 Removing and installing the speaker inside the outside
mirror cover”, page 99
⇒ “8.2.2 Remove and install the speaker built into the internal door
cover”, page 99

8.2.1 Removing and installing the speaker in‐


side the outside mirror cover
Applies to vehicles with electrically adjustable exterior mirrors.
In the event of a fault, the internal mirror cover must be replaced
⇒ Body Work; Rep. gr. 70 .

8.2.2 Remove and install the speaker built into


the internal door cover
Applies to vehicles with manually adjustable exterior mirrors.
Removing
Vehicles without preparation for screwing in a new loudspeaker:
In the event of a fault, replace the internal door cover or the cover
for the internal door control ⇒ Body Work; Rep. gr. 70 .
Vehicles with preparation for screwing in a new speaker:
– Remove the front door panel ⇒ Body Work; Rep. gr. 70 .

8. Loudspeaker arrangement 99
Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 02.2018

– Carefully drill out the heads of the plastic rivets -1- with a suit‐
able drill and remove the speaker -2-.
– Remove remains of the plastic rivets (cut off, grind down).
Installing
Installation is performed in the reverse order, pay attention to the
following points:
– Secure new speaker -2- with screws -3- (see ⇒ Electronic
Catalogue of Original Parts “ETKA” ).
Tightening torques
Component Nm
Fixing screws for speakers 0.5 Nm

100 Rep. gr.91 - Radio, telephone, navigation


Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 02.2018

9 SmartLink system
⇒ “9.1 SmartLink system - general instructions”, page 101

9.1 SmartLink system - general instructions


♦ The SmartLink system transmits the communication between
the vehicle's infotainment system and a connected communi‐
cation device (mobile/tablet) belong to the customer.
♦ As of week 22/2017, the SmartLink system is replaced by the
SmartLink+ system. This renders the control unit for wireless
data transmission - J1070- obsolete that was previously in‐
stalled under the seat. Your functions are integrated in the
Control unit for information electronics 1 - J794- .
♦ Using this system, the software applications installed in the
communications equipment (such as navigation, web radio,
weather), can be displayed and controlled in the infotainment
display.
♦ The SmartLink system is part of the maximum infotainment
equipment (Bolero, Amundsen) and has no other separately
installed parts.
♦ You can find a a detailed description of functions, operation as
well as connection up to KW 21/2017 in the ⇒ Bolero / Amund‐
sen Infotainment instruction manual , from KW 22/2017 in the
⇒ Rapid Owner’s Manual ,“infotainment” chapter.
The SmartLink function supports the following types of connection
♦ Android Auto
♦ Apple CarPlay
♦ MirrorLink

Caution

For correct communication with the SmartLink system, the


customer's communications device (mobile phone/tablet) and
the installed software applications must function correctly.
Not every mobile/tablet is compatible within the scope of the
SmartLink system.
For details of mobile/tablet compatibility, and the available ap‐
plications, visit the ŠKODA website.
ŠKODA AUTO a.s. assumes no responsibility for any problems
due to incompatibility or improper function of cell phones/tab‐
lets or the applications installed on them

9. SmartLink system 101


Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 02.2018

10 SmartGate system
⇒ “10.1 SmartGate system - general notes”, page 102
⇒ “10.2 SmartGate system - check the correct function”,
page 103
⇒ “10.3 Removing and installing the control unit for wireless data
transfer J1070 (SmartGate)”, page 104
⇒ “10.4 Set the parameters for the WLAN connection”,
page 105
⇒ “10.5 Update firmware”, page 106

10.1 SmartGate system - general notes


SmartGate system
♦ As of week 22/2017, the SmartGate system is replaced by the
SmartLink system,
⇒ “9.1 SmartLink system - general instructions”, page 101 .
♦ The SmartGate system offers the possibility to access the
driving data via the wireless WLAN connection.
♦ This is one-way communication of the connected communi‐
cations of the customer's equipment (e.g., mobile phone, tab‐
let, laptop) with the control unit for the SmartGate system.
♦ The driving data received can then be processed (depending
on the application used and installed on the communications
equipment).
♦ The WLAN range is limited to the interior of the vehicle.
♦ The control unit for wireless data transfer - J1070- located un‐
der the driver's seat is part of the system.
♦ For a detailed description of the functions, operations and
connection, see the ⇒ Rapid Owner's Manual .

Caution

Correct communication within the scope of the SmartGate sys‐


tem relies on the customer's communications equipment (e.g.,
mobile phone/tablet) functioning correctly, and on the software
applications being installed.
Not every cell phone/tablet is compatible within the scope of
the SmartGate system.
For details of mobile phone/tablet compatibility, and the avail‐
able applications, visit the ŠKODA website (www.skoda-
auto.com).
ŠKODA AUTO a.s. assumes no responsibility for any problems
due to incompatibility or improper function of cell phones/tab‐
lets or the applications installed on them

102 Rep. gr.91 - Radio, telephone, navigation


Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 02.2018

10.2 SmartGate system - check the correct


function

Caution

Correct communication within the scope of the SmartGate sys‐


tem relies on the communications equipment (e.g., mobile/
tablet) functioning correctly, and on the software applications
being installed.
Not every cell phone/tablet is compatible within the scope of
the SmartGate system.
For details of mobile phone/tablet compatibility, and the avail‐
able applications, visit the ŠKODA website (www.skoda-
auto.com).
ŠKODA AUTO a.s. assumes no responsibility for any problems
due to incompatibility or improper function of cell phones/tab‐
lets or the applications installed on them

For a detailed description of the functions, operations and con‐


nection, see the ⇒ Rapid Owner's Manual .
The correct function of the SmartGate system is verified by the
device itself.
To check it is working correctly, you can use, e.g., ⇒ Vehicle di‐
agnostic tester mobiles, tablets, and laptops, referred to as “com‐
munication devices” below.
For the connection, ask the customer for the PIN code (password)
for the SmartGate system.
Connecting with a WLAN device
Requirements:
♦ Switch on Wi-Fi on the communications equipment to be con‐
nected
♦ Switch on the ignition
Open a connection to SmartGate (login to a WLAN network)
♦ Search for available WLAN connections on the connected
communications equipment - SmartGate identifies the con‐
nected communications device as SmartGate_...
♦ The last six symbols of the vehicle identification number (VIN
code) are displayed at the position....
♦ Enter the password supplied by the customer, for the initial
connection, enter the 17 digits of the vehicle identification
number (VIN) (in uppercase).

Note

♦ If no PIN code (password) is available, then switch off the ig‐


nition and, if necessary, disconnect the battery earth strap or
the connector on the SmartGate unit for approx. 30 seconds.
♦ After re-connecting the battery earth strap, switch on the igni‐
tion and enter the vehicle identification number (in uppercase)
as the PIN code.
♦ Up to four communications devices can be connected to the
SmartGate system at the same time.

10. SmartGate system 103


Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 02.2018

Connection problems
If the connection fails, then check the following points:
♦ Are the conditions for a successful connection fulfilled?
♦ Does SmartGate show up in the list of available WLAN net‐
works?
♦ Was password required for validating the connection entered
correctly?
♦ Is the communications equipment to be connected possibly
still connected to another WLAN network?
If the above mentioned points are okay, and the connection still
fails, then check the state of the LED display on the control unit
for wireless data transfer - J1070- (SmartGate) located under the
driver's seat.
If the LED display -arrow- on the control unit:
♦ is unlit or lit red, the device is not OK, check the electrical wiring
as per ⇒ Current flow diagrams, Electrical fault finding and
Fitting locations; if needed, replace the SmartGate control unit
♦ red flashing - this is a self-test, wait for the test to complete (on
initial activation)
♦ lit green – the device is OK, no user is connected
♦ green flashing - the device is OK, at least one user is connec‐
ted and the SmartGate application is active on the connected
communication device (if you connect without an active appli‐
cation - the LED display is lit green)
♦ flashing red and green - the device is OK; and still in production
mode (indicates production mode, for example in Production,
where multiple vehicles with SmartGate exist at one location)
♦ orange (red and green at the same time) – the device is in
upgrade mode, wait for this mode to complete
Disconnecting
The connection to SmartGate can be disconnected in one of the
following ways:
♦ by disconnecting the connection to SmartGate on the connec‐
ted communications device
♦ by disabling WLAN on the connected communications device
♦ by switching off the ignition and removing the ignition key for
more than 5 s (for vehicles with an ignition starter switch, by
switching off the ignition and opening the driver door)

10.3 Removing and installing the control unit


for wireless data transfer - J1070-
(SmartGate)
Removing
The control unit for wireless data transfer - J1070- (SmartGate) is
attached under the driver's seat to the floor covering by a Velcro
fastener.
– Move the driver's seat as far back and up as possible.

104 Rep. gr.91 - Radio, telephone, navigation


Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 02.2018

– Remove control unit -2- from the Velcro fastener and, taking
the lengths of the connected cables into consideration, re‐
move the unit.
– Disconnect plug connection -1-.

– To pull off the connector, press the latch -1-, and release the
connector by tilting out the bar -arrow-.
Installing
Installation is performed in the reverse order, pay attention to the
following points:
– Fit the unit control close to the seat cross-member on the level
surface of the floor covering (see figure)
– The electrical wiring loom for the control unit must not be under
tension.
– Press the control unit securely onto the floor covering.
– Do the following when replacing the control unit:
♦ Update firmware ⇒ “10.5 Update firmware”, page 106
♦ Check functionality
⇒ “10.2 SmartGate system - check the correct function”, page
103

10.4 Set the parameters for the WLAN con‐


nection
Some properties of the WLAN connection can be changed and
configured using the connected communications device (e.g.,
⇒ Vehicle diagnostic tester, mobile phone, tablet, laptop).
After fulfilling the conditions for a successful connection, enter the
address »HTTP://192.168.123.1/index.html« in the web browser
of the connected communications device. You will see a menu for
setting the parameters for the SmartGate WLAN connection.
Configuration options:
♦ SSID
♦ Chanel (1 to 10) – manual setting of the connection channel
♦ Security – setting the security level for the connection
Open – unencrypted connection, no password entry required
on the device to be connected; the connection is set up auto‐
matically
WPA or WPA2 – encrypted connection
♦ WPA/WPA2 key - password input
♦ Transmitting power in % - sets the signal strength in percent
♦ DHCP (lease time) - time for which the IP address remains
valid
♦ Web interface: port - web interface

10. SmartGate system 105


Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 02.2018

If you change the connection encryption from unsecured (open)


to secured WPA or WPA2, you must enter a password on the
communications equipment to be connected.
If no PIN code (password) is available, then switch off the ignition
and, if necessary, disconnect the battery earth strap or the con‐
nector on the SmartGate unit for approx. 30 seconds. The Smart‐
Gate is reset to the factory default settings and transmission
encryption is set to WPA2.
After re-connecting the battery earth strap, switch on the ignition
and enter the vehicle identification number (in uppercase) as the
PIN code.

10.5 Update firmware


To update the SmartGate firmware, you can use, e.g., ⇒ Vehicle
diagnostic tester mobile phones, tablets, laptops; referred to as
communications devices in the following.

Caution

Correct communication within the scope of the SmartGate sys‐


tem relies on the communications device functioning correctly,
and on the software applications being installed.
Not every cell phone/tablet is compatible within the scope of
the SmartGate system.
For details of mobile phone/tablet compatibility, and the avail‐
able applications, visit the ŠKODA website (www.skoda-
auto.com).
The firmware update function is not available in the Internet
Explorer web browser version 9 and older.

Update data from the ŠKODA website are needed for the firm‐
ware update.
During the entire upgrade process, make sure that the ignition is
on, or the engine is running (avoid starting the engine during the
upgrade procedure).
Update procedure:
– Download the update data for SmartGate from the ŠKODA
website; save them on the communications device (one file).
– Switch on WLAN on the communications device.
– Switch on the ignition and start the engine.
– Connect the communications device with SmartGate.
– Open the web browser on the communications device, and
enter the address »HTTP://192.168.123.1/index.html«.
– At the bottom of the SmartGate menu that appears, select the
firmware upgrade menu item.
– Select the update data stored on the communications device.
– Pressing “start update” copies the update data to SmartGate
(copying takes about 5 min).
– After downloading the data and confirming “perform update”,
the update starts (the update process takes approx. 2 min).
– After completing firmware update, the SmartGate is restarted.

106 Rep. gr.91 - Radio, telephone, navigation


Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 02.2018

Note

♦ During the update process, the LED display on the control unit
for control unit for wireless data transfer - J1070- -arrow- lights
up orange (red and green at the same time).
♦ After completing the update and restarting the SmartGate, the
LED display -arrow- lights up/flashes green (see
⇒ page 104 ).

10. SmartGate system 107


Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 02.2018

11 Mobile services online


⇒ “11.1 General Instructions”, page 108
⇒ “11.2 Installation location overview - mobile online services”,
page 108
⇒ “11.3 Removing and installing control unit for emergency call
module and communication unit J949 ”, page 110
⇒ “11.4 Removing and installing emergency call button E276 ”,
page 111
⇒ “11.5 Removing and installing speaker for emergency call mod‐
ule R335 ”, page 111
⇒ “11.6 Replacing battery for control unit for emergency call mod‐
ule and communication unit J949 ”, page 111
⇒ “11.7 Replacing, adapting and activating control unit for emer‐
gency call module and communication unit J949 ”, page 112
⇒ “11.8 Checking that the components and communication of the
ERA Glonass system are functioning”, page 114

11.1 General Instructions


The functions for mobile services online are integrated into the
control unit for emergency call module and communication unit -
J949- .
When handling a fault it is absolutely essential to know the func‐
tions of the mobile services online.
Further information and description of function ⇒ Owner's manual
Rapid .
Fault finding is performed using ⇒ Vehicle diagnostic tester.

11.2 Installation location overview - mobile online services

108 Rep. gr.91 - Radio, telephone, navigation


Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 02.2018

1 - Control unit for emergency


call module and communica‐
tion unit - J949-
❑ Removing and installing
⇒ “11.3 Removing and
installing control unit for
emergency call module
and communication unit
J949 ”, page 110
❑ Replace, adjust and ac‐
tivate
⇒ “11.7 Replacing,
adapting and activating
control unit for emer‐
gency call module and
communication unit
J949 ”, page 112
2 - GSM aerial
On vehicles without DAB aerial
(digital radio receiver) and on
vehicles for Russia and Bela‐
rus, the GPS aerial is on the
roof (does not apply to the
Spaceback model with panor‐
amic sunroof)
❑ Removing and installing
⇒ “4.2 Removing and in‐
stalling roof aerial”,
page 85
On vehicles with panoramic
sunroof, with DAB aerial (digi‐
tal radio receiver), the aerial is
under the dash panel
❑ Removing and installing
⇒ “4.4 Removing and in‐
stalling the GSM aerial”,
page 88
3 - GPS aerial
Volkswagen Technical Site: http://vwts.ru http://vwts.info
On vehicles for Russia and Belarus and on vehicles without DAB (digital radio receiver), the aerial is on the
roof (does not apply to the Spaceback model with panoramic sunroof)
❑ Removing and installing ⇒ “4.2 Removing and installing roof aerial”, page 85
On other vehicles, the aerial is under the dash panel
❑ Removing and installing ⇒ “4.3 Removing and installing the GPS aerial”, page 87
4 - Emergency call button - E276-
❑ Removing and installing ⇒ “11.4 Removing and installing emergency call button E276 ”, page 111
5 - Telephone microphone - R38-
❑ in the front interior light
❑ Removing and installing
⇒ “5.3 Removing and installing the microphone for the telephone R38 ”, page 93
6 - Roof aerial
❑ Removing and installing ⇒ “4.2 Removing and installing roof aerial”, page 85
7 - Control unit for IT 1 - J794-
❑ Removing and installing ⇒ “3.6 Removing and installing the infotainment control unit”, page 78
8 - Display unit for control unit of the display and operating unit, front information - J685-
❑ In the centre of the dash panel

11. Mobile services online 109


Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 02.2018
❑ Removing and installing ⇒ “3.5 Remove and install infotainment display unit”, page 77
9 - Speaker for emergency call module - R335-
❑ Removing and installing
⇒ “11.5 Removing and installing speaker for emergency call module R335 ”, page 111

11.3 Removing and installing control unit for


emergency call module and communi‐
cation unit - J949-
The control unit for emergency call module and communication
unit - J949- is behind the dash panel on the driver's side.

Note

For replacement, follow


⇒ “11.7 Replacing, adapting and activating control unit for emer‐
gency call module and communication unit J949 ”, page 112 .

Removing
– Switch off the ignition and all electrical consumers!
– Place the ignition key outside the vehicle to avoid accidentally
turning on the ignition.
– Remove the side vent from the dash panel on the driver's side
⇒ Heating, Air Conditioning; Rep. gr. 80 .
– Remove the side cover on the dash panel -1- on the driver's
side in -direction of arrow-.
– Remove the light switch
⇒ “2.1 Removing and installing light switch”, page 207 and the
headlight range control adjuster
⇒ “2.2 Removing and installing the headlight range control ad‐
juster”, page 207 .
– Unlock and disconnect the plug of the control unit for emer‐
gency call module and communication unit - J949- .

– Push the retaining tab in direction of arrow -A- and then slide
the control unit for emergency call module and communication
unit - J949- -1- out of the bracket -2- in direction of arrow -B-.
Installing
Installation is performed in the reverse order, pay attention to the
following points:
– Slide the control unit into the bracket up to the stop until the
retaining tab locks into place, arrow -A-.

110 Rep. gr.91 - Radio, telephone, navigation


Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 02.2018

11.4 Removing and installing emergency call


button - E276-
Removing
– Removing the storage compartment in the headliner ⇒ Body
Work; Rep. gr. 68 .
– Use a small screwdriver to release the retaining clips -2- on
both sides and remove the emergency call button - E276- Pos.
-1-.
Installing
Installation is carried out in the reverse order.

11.5 Removing and installing speaker for


emergency call module - R335-
Removing
– Unclip cover with speaker -2- out of the centre console -1- us‐
ing the disassembly wedge and remove it, taking into account
the length of the connected cable.
– Release connector and pull it off.

– Unscrew screws -1- and detach speaker for emergency call


module - R335- -2- from the cover -3-.
Installing
Installation is carried out in the reverse order.
Tightening torques
Fixing screws for speakers 1.5 Nm

11.6 Replacing battery for control unit for


emergency call module and communi‐
cation unit - J949-
– Remove the control unit for emergency call module and com‐
munication unit - J949- .
⇒ “11.3 Removing and installing control unit for emergency call
module and communication unit J949 ”, page 110

11. Mobile services online 111


Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 02.2018

– Unscrew the screw on the control unit from below and remove
the battery cover.
– Replace the battery and re-install the control unit.

11.7 Replacing, adapting and activating con‐


trol unit for emergency call module and
communication unit - J949-
⇒ “11.7.1 Replacing, adapting and activating control unit for emer‐
gency call module and communication unit J949 , vehicles for EU
countries except Russia and Belarus”, page 112
⇒ “11.7.2 Replacing, adapting and activating control unit for emer‐
gency call module and communication unit J949 , vehicles for
Russia and Belarus”, page 113

11.7.1 Replacing, adapting and activating con‐


trol unit for emergency call module and
communication unit - J949- , vehicles for
EU countries except Russia and Belarus
• Data for “targeted fault-finding” in ⇒ Vehicle diagnostic tester
current
Procedure when replacing:
– In Targeted fault finding or Targeted functions op‐
erating mode for the control unit for emergency call module
and communication unit - J949- , select the Commissioning/
replace function (address 0075) ⇒ Vehicle diagnostic tester.

– Follow the instructions on the ⇒ Vehicle diagnostic tester (in‐


cludes the steps: coding, parameterisation, adaptation to im‐
mobiliser).
– In Targeted fault finding or Targeted functions op‐
erating mode for the control unit for emergency call module
and communication unit - J949- , select the Activate function
⇒ Vehicle diagnostic tester.
– Exit Targeted fault-finding or Targeted functions .
– Remove ignition key (for vehicles with interface for entry and
start system, switch off ignition and open the driver's door for
at least 5 seconds).
– Disconnect ⇒ Vehicle diagnostic tester.
– Drive the vehicle out of the workshop to ensure GPS and GSM
signal reception (the GSM and GPS signal strength can be
read in the measured value block).
– Switch on the ignition and leave switched on for at least 10
minutes, but do not connect the vehicle diagnosis tester .
The status LED -1- is lit red after ignition is switched on.
When successfully activated after the communication profile has
been downloaded, the colour of the status LED -2- changes from
red to green as you wait.
– Checking the functions of the Škoda Connect services (see ⇒
Rapid Owner's Manual ). If they are not active, restart the in‐
fotainment unit (press the switch-on button/virtual switch-on
button on the display unit for approx. 15 seconds until the in‐
fotainment unit restarts).

112 Rep. gr.91 - Radio, telephone, navigation


Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 02.2018

11.7.2 Replacing, adapting and activating con‐


trol unit for emergency call module and
communication unit - J949- , vehicles for
Russia and Belarus
• Data for “targeted fault-finding” in ⇒ Vehicle diagnostic tester
current
Procedure when replacing:
– In Targeted fault finding or Targeted functions op‐
erating mode for the control unit for emergency call module
and communication unit - J949- , select the Transfer/re-
place function (address 0075) ⇒ Vehicle diagnostic tester.

– Follow the instructions on the ⇒ Vehicle diagnostic tester (in‐


cludes the steps: coding, parameterisation, adaptation to im‐
mobiliser).
– In Targeted fault finding or Targeted functions op‐
erating mode for the control unit for emergency call module
and communication unit - J949- , select the Activate function
⇒ Vehicle diagnostic tester.
– Exit Targeted fault-finding or Targeted functions .
– Remove ignition key (for vehicles with interface for entry and
start system, switch off ignition and open the driver's door for
at least 5 seconds).
– Disconnect ⇒ Vehicle diagnostic tester.
– Drive the vehicle out of the workshop to ensure GPS and GSM
signal reception (the GSM and GPS signal strength can be
read in the measured value block).
– Switch on ignition.
The status LED -2- is lit red after ignition is switched on.
When successfully activated after the communication profile has
been downloaded (this may take up to 15 minutes or even longer,
depending on GPS and GSM signal strength), the colour of the
status LED -2- changes from red to green.
If the status LED -2- is green, the ERA Glonass system is activa‐
ted.
Each time the ignition key is disconnect and the ignition is then
switched on, the status LED lights up red and then, after approx.
5 seconds, switches to green.

Caution

After successful activation, connect the ⇒ Vehicle diagnostic


tester and read out the SIM ID number in the SIM card block
using the “Measured value blocks” (address 0075 - read meas‐
ured values) of the control unit for emergency call module and
communication unit - J949- . You must record this number
(nine digits) on the customer order. The customer should then
be informed that he/she must notify the road traffic authority
that the control unit for emergency call module and communi‐
cation unit - J949- has been replaced and provide the authority
with the above SIM ID number to be entered in the vehicle da‐
tabase.

11. Mobile services online 113


Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 02.2018

11.8 Checking that the components and


communication of the ERA Glonass sys‐
tem are functioning

Note

♦ Applies to vehicles for Russia and Belarus.


♦ You can check that the individual components are working and
the ERA Glonass system is communicating with the ⇒ Vehicle
diagnostic tester or by performing the system self-test.
♦ To run the function test for the components and communica‐
tion, the ERA Glonass system must be activated.
♦ The ERA Glonass system is activated for the first time after
switching off transport mode (see ⇒ Maintenance ; Booklet
Rapid ).

The self-test checks the following:


♦ OCU control unit, SW integrity and realtime
♦ GNSS (GPS) aerial
♦ GSM aerial
♦ Microphone
♦ Loudspeaker
♦ Connection of the unit with other components (BUS commu‐
nication, airbag)
♦ Connection of HMI components
♦ Button in headliner
♦ Condition of the emergency battery
Self-test of the components and communication of the ERA Glo‐
nass system
– Switch on ignition.
– Swivel out the cap cover for the SOS button -arrow- and press
the button -2- for approx. 3 seconds with a thin object (e.g. a
pin).
1- Emergency call button
2- LED warning light
3- Button for test start
– Pressing the button -2- activates the voice prompts for the test
sequence. The individual steps are confirmed by pressing the
button -1-.
– Also follow the voice prompts.
A voice prompt confirms if the test sequence has been completed
successfully.
Evaluate the test before switch off the ignition.
The test result is indicated by the type of flashing signals from the
warning light -3-.
– After the ignition is switched off, the ERA Glonass system is
reactivated and the warning light lights up green for a short
period (the warning light may light up green even if a fault has
been identified).

114 Rep. gr.91 - Radio, telephone, navigation


Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 02.2018

Evaluating the test:


Step Tested component/communica‐ Determined state LED warning light flashes
tion
0 ERA Glonass system No fault detected green
1 Vehicle identification number Vehicle identification number empty/ x1 green, x1 red
no configuration
2 Microphone Microphone not working x1 green, x2 red
3 Loudspeaker Speaker not working x1 green, x3 red
4 Button in headliner Button not working x1 green, x4 red
5 Airbag/crash sensors No signal x1 green, x5 red
6 Main GSM aerial No signal x1 green, x6 red
7 Reserve GSM aerial (if fitted) No signal x1 green, x7 red
8 GNSS (GPS) aerial No signal x1 green, x8 red
9 Mute signal Line interruption x1 green, x9 red
10 IVS internal error Internal IVS/SIM card/NAD not func‐ x1 green, x10 red
tioning correctly
11 Emergency battery (see Battery weak/defective x1 green, x11 red
⇒ “11.6 Replacing battery for
control unit for emergency call
module and communication unit
J949 ”, page 111 )
12 Ignition Failure/interruption of ignition x1 green, x12 red

11. Mobile services online 115


Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 02.2018

92 – Windscreen wash/wipe system


1 Windscreen washer system
⇒ “1.1 Removing and installing washer fluid reservoir, washer flu‐
id pumps and sensor for washer fluid level”, page 116
⇒ “1.2 Removing and installing the spray nozzles for windscreen
washer system”, page 117
⇒ “1.3 Repairing washer fluid lines”, page 117

1.1 Removing and installing washer fluid


reservoir, washer fluid pumps and sen‐
sor for washer fluid level
Removing
– Switch off the ignition and all electrical consumers!
– Slacken the front part of the right wheelhouse liner ⇒ Body
Work; Rep. gr. 66 .
– Release plug from the washer fluid pumps for windscreen
-6-, for headlight -9- and from sensor for washer fluid level
-1-.
– To unlock, turn the locking clip on the hose connections -3-
(black marking - front windscreen washer), -5- (white marking
- rear windscreen washer) and disconnect the connections
from the washer fluid pump -4-. Collect the flowing out washer
fluid in a suitable vessel.
– To unlock press the securing clamp and pull off hose with
coupling -8- from the washer fluid pump for headlight -7-.
– If necessary slide the washer fluid pumps out of the washer
fluid reservoir to the top (turn the washer fluid pump for head‐
light -7- approx. 90° before sliding out) and remove the sensor
for the washer fluid level -1-.
– Remove front bumper ⇒ Body Work; Rep. gr. 63 .
– Remove cap from reservoir supports.

– Push the reservoir support -4- out of the holder -3-.


– Push out the clamp -5- -arrow-.
– Unscrew nut -1- and remove reservoir -2-.
Installing
Installation is performed in the reverse order, pay attention to the
following points:
– Hoses with angled pieces must click audibly into the connec‐
tions on the washer fluid pumps.
Tightening torques
Fixing nuts for reservoir 8 Nm

116 Rep. gr.92 - Windscreen wash/wipe system


Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 02.2018

1.2 Removing and installing the spray noz‐


zles for windscreen washer system
Removing
– Press the nozzle upwards in direction of arrow -A- and unhook
from the front flap in direction of arrow -B-.

– Unlock by pulling out the locking clip -3- and detach the hose
connection -2- from the spray nozzle.
– Disconnect the plug connection -1- of the heated nozzles.
Installing
Installation is performed in the reverse order, pay attention to the
following points:
– Adjust the spray nozzles ⇒ Maintenance ; Booklet Rapid .

1.3 Repairing washer fluid lines


All the notes and comments for this chapter can be found in the
Workshop Manual ⇒ Electrical System - General notes; Rep. gr.
92 . If a note cannot be accessed, open the Workshop Manual
“Electrical System - General Notes” manually in “ELSA”, Section
“92”.

1. Windscreen washer system 117


Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 02.2018

2 Windscreen wiper and washer sys‐


tem
⇒ “2.1 Removing and installing the wiper arms with wiper blades
and setting their final setting”, page 118
⇒ “2.2 Removing and installing wiper motor with linkage”,
page 119
⇒ “2.3 Removing and installing windscreen wiper motor from link‐
age”, page 120
⇒ “2.4 Removing and installing sensor for rain and light detection
G397 , vehicles up to CW 21.2015”, page 121
⇒ “2.5 Removing and installing sensor for rain and light detection
G397 , vehicles from CW 22.2015”, page 123
⇒ “2.6 Repairing sensor for rain and light detection G397 , vehi‐
cles from CW 22.2015”, page 125

2.1 Removing and installing the wiper arms


with wiper blades and setting their final
setting
Special tools and workshop equipment required
♦ Extractor for wiper arms - T10369/1-
Removing
– Use a screwdriver to lever off the two caps for nuts on the wiper
arms.
– Unscrew the nuts -arrows-.

– Push the extractor for wiper arms - T10369/1- , Pos. -2-, onto
the arm, as shown in the illustration.

Note

To release the windscreen wiper arms, always use the thrust


piece -3- in order to avoid damage to the thread of the wiper motor
shaft.

– Release the wiper arm -4- from the shaft by turning the pres‐
sure screw -1-.
Installing
– Switch wiper motor on and off and run until it is in park position.
– Position the wiper arms (shorter wiper arm on the driver's side)
so that:

118 Rep. gr.92 - Windscreen wash/wipe system


Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 02.2018

On the driver's side, there must be a distance -A- of 28 +1/-3 mm


between the upper lip of the wiper blade and the upper edge of
the plenum chamber cover.

On the front passenger side, there must be a distance -B- of 27


±2 mm between the upper lip of the wiper blade and the upper
edge of the plenum chamber cover.
– Slightly tighten fixing nuts.
– Operate the flick wipe, if necessary align wiper arms once
again and tighten the securing nuts.
Tightening torques
Fixing nut for wiper arms 21 Nm

2.2 Removing and installing wiper motor


with linkage
Removing
– Switch off the ignition and all electrical consumers!
– Remove wiper arms with wiper blades
⇒ “2.1 Removing and installing the wiper arms with wiper
blades and setting their final setting”, page 118 .
– Remove the plenum chamber cover ⇒ Body Work; Rep. gr.
66 .
– Remove bulkhead ⇒ Body work; Rep. gr. 50 .
– Unscrew securing bolts -arrows-.
– Unplug connector -1- at wiper motor.
– Push the wiper motor with the linkage -2- towards the engine
and remove.
Installing
Installation is performed in the reverse order, pay attention to the
following points:

2. Windscreen wiper and washer system 119


Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 02.2018

– When installing, insert the rig pin -2- into the rubber bearing
-1-.
Tightening torques
Fixing screws for wiper motor with linkage 7 Nm

2.3 Removing and installing windscreen


wiper motor from linkage
Special tools and workshop equipment required
♦ Disassembly tool for door panel - T10236-
Removing
– Removing wiper motor with linkage
⇒ “2.2 Removing and installing wiper motor with linkage”, page
119 .
– Use a removal tool -2- to lever off the rod -1- from joint holder
-arrow-.

– Unscrew fixing screws -arrows- and remove the wiper motor


with control unit from the mounting frame.

120 Rep. gr.92 - Windscreen wash/wipe system


Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 02.2018

Installing

Note

Lever -2- is attached to the motor shaft -1- and cannot be disas‐
sembled. The lever position is not configured.

– Press rod -1- onto the joint holder -arrow-.


Tightening torques
Fixing screws for wiper motor 8 Nm
Fixing nuts for crank on wiper motor 18 Nm

2.4 Removing and installing sensor for rain


and light detection - G397- , vehicles up
to CW 21.2015

Caution

If the sensor for rain and light detection - G397- is removed


from the retaining plate on the windscreen (e.g. when changing
the windscreen), it can be subsequently installed again. Store
the removed sensor dust-free until it is installed again and
make sure that the silicone coupling cushion does not get dirty.

Removing
– Switch off all electrical components and take out the ignition
key.
– Removing interior rear-view mirror ⇒ Body Work; Rep. gr. 68 .
– Disconnect plug -1- from sensor -2-.

2. Windscreen wiper and washer system 121


Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 02.2018

– Lever the sensor -1- carefully and slowly from the retaining
plate -2- at the recess -3- using a suitable cross-head screw‐
driver.

Note

When removing, make sure to lever off the complete sensor and
not only the upper shell of the sensor.

Installing
Installation is performed in the reverse order, pay attention to the
following points:

Caution

♦ Thoroughly clean the windscreen inside the retaining plate


with e.g. isopropyl (technical alcohol).
♦ The surface (coupling cushion) of the sensor must not get
dirty or damaged when installing. A sensor with a dam‐
aged coupling cushion must be replaced.

Note

If the surface (coupling cushion) of the sensor is dirty, it can be


cleaned, if necessary, by sticking on one or several adhesive
tapes and then pulling them off again.

– If necessary, remove the protective cap of the new sensor.

– Insert the sensor -1- into the retaining plate on the windscreen
-2- and press firmly.

Note

♦ Even after correct installation of the sensor, smaller air bub‐


bles can be present initially between the windscreen and the
coupling cushion. The contact surface must be free of bubbles
after approx. 10 minutes.
♦ When replacing, the new sensor must be coded with the ⇒ Ve‐
hicle diagnostic tester.

122 Rep. gr.92 - Windscreen wash/wipe system


Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 02.2018

2.5 Removing and installing sensor for rain


and light detection - G397- , vehicles
from CW 22.2015

Caution

Do not touch the optical unit of the sensor. It could become


damaged.
Store the undamaged removed sensor dust-free until it is in‐
stalled again and make sure that it does not get dirty.
If damage occurs to the coupling cushion during sensor re‐
moval, the sensor must be repaired
⇒ “2.6 Repairing sensor for rain and light detection G397 ,
vehicles from CW 22.2015”, page 125 .

Removing

Note

To facilitate removal, turn the mirror as necessary.

– Switch off the ignition and all electrical consumers!


– Removing interior rear-view mirror ⇒ Body Work; Rep. gr. 68 .
– Release retaining clip -1- -arrow-.

Note

Observe a waiting time of at least 1 minute after releasing the


retaining clip. This allows the silicone layer to expand so that it
will not be damaged while it is being removed.

2. Windscreen wiper and washer system 123


Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 02.2018

– Carefully lever the sensor for rain and light detection - G397-
Pos. -2- out of the retaining frame from above starting from the
front windscreen.
– Unlock and pull off connector -1-.
Installing
Installation is performed in the reverse order, pay attention to the
following points:

Caution

♦ Thoroughly clean the windscreen inside the retaining plate


with e.g. isopropyl (technical alcohol). No original coupling
cushion residues may remain on the pane.
♦ There are several versions of the sensors (up to three
functions depending on equipment, sensor for rain and
light detection and humidity). Ensure that the correct com‐
ponent is used for replacement, see ⇒ Electronic Cata‐
logue of Original Parts “ETKA” .
♦ The surface (coupling cushion) of the sensor must not get
dirty or damaged when installing. If damaged, repair the
sensor (see
⇒ “2.6 Repairing sensor for rain and light detection G397 ,
vehicles from CW 22.2015”, page 125 ).

Note

If the surface (coupling cushion) of the sensor is dirty, it can be


cleaned, if necessary, by sticking on one or several adhesive
tapes and then pulling them off again.

– If a new sensor is installed, press the grips in


-direction of arrow A- and remove the protective cap -1- in
-direction of arrow B-.
– Mount plug.
– Insert the sensor into the retaining frame on the windscreen.

124 Rep. gr.92 - Windscreen wash/wipe system


Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 02.2018

– Press retaining clip -1- on until the catches -arrows- audibly


click into place.

Note

♦ Even after correct installation of the sensor, smaller air bub‐


bles can be present initially between the windscreen and the
coupling cushion. The contact surface must be free of bubbles
after approx. 10 minutes.
♦ If the contact surface is not free of bubbles after 10 minutes,
the sensor must be removed and re-installed.
♦ Air bubbles between the windscreen and the coupling cushion
cause sensor malfunctions.

– When replacing, the new sensor must be coded with the ⇒ Ve‐
hicle diagnostic tester.

2.6 Repairing sensor for rain and light de‐


tection - G397- , vehicles from CW
22.2015
⇒ “2.6.1 Repairing the sensor for rain and light detection G397 -
TRW manufacturer”, page 125
⇒ “2.6.2 Repairing the rain and light detector sensor G397 , Valeo
manufacturer”, page 126

2.6.1 Repairing the sensor for rain and light


detection - G397- - TRW manufacturer
There are different bushings for the rain sensor from different
manufacturers.
The sensor bushing with optical unit is also supplied with retaining
clips as a spare part. These must be removed for vehicles that do
not require retaining clips.
Work procedure:
– Remove the sensor
⇒ “2.5 Removing and installing sensor for rain and light de‐
tection G397 , vehicles from CW 22.2015”, page 123 .

Caution

Risk of damaging the sensor for rain and light detection elec‐
tronics.
♦ When disconnecting the sleeve parts, do not insert the
screwdriver until the electronics of the sensor for rain and
light detection.
♦ Do not touch the electronics of the sensor for rain and light
detection.

2. Windscreen wiper and washer system 125


Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 02.2018

– Undo retaining tabs -arrows- with a suitable screwdriver and


remove clamps -1-.

– Disconnect the upper part of the sleeve with an optical unit


-1- by unlocking the retaining lugs -arrows- from the bottom
part -2-.

– Remove sensor for rain and light detection electronics -2- from
the old upper part -1- and insert into the new part.
– Lock the upper part of the sleeve with the optical unit and the
protective cap to the bottom part of the sleeve.
– Install the sensor for rain and light detection
⇒ “2.5 Removing and installing sensor for rain and light de‐
tection G397 , vehicles from CW 22.2015”, page 123 .

2.6.2 Repairing the rain and light detector


sensor - G397- , Valeo manufacturer

Note

♦ There are various bushings for the Rain and light detector
sensor - G397- from different manufacturers.
♦ The sensor bushing with optical unit is also supplied with re‐
taining clips as a spare part. These must be removed for
vehicles that do not require retaining clips.

Work procedure
– Remove the sensor
⇒ “2.5 Removing and installing sensor for rain and light de‐
tection G397 , vehicles from CW 22.2015”, page 123 .

126 Rep. gr.92 - Windscreen wash/wipe system


Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 02.2018

– Carefully remove the silicone cushion -2- or the residues from


the sensor -1-.

Caution

The surface of the sensor must be completely free of foil resi‐


dues.

– Clean the sensor surface with cleaning solution.

– Remove the silicone paper -3- from the cushion -2-.


• Transparent protective foil -1- stays on the cushion -2- to begin
with as assembly film.

– Attach cushion -2- with the protective foil -1- on the sensor
-3-.

– Press the cushion onto the sensor -2- through the transparent
foil -1-, so that there are no bubbles between the foil and sen‐
sor.

2. Windscreen wiper and washer system 127


Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 02.2018

– Carefully pull the transparent protective foil -1- off the cushion
-2-.
– Install the Rain and light detector sensor - G397-
⇒ “2.5 Removing and installing sensor for rain and light
detection G397 , vehicles from CW 22.2015”, page 123 .

128 Rep. gr.92 - Windscreen wash/wipe system


Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 02.2018

3 Rear window wiper and washer sys‐


tem
⇒ “3.1 Removing and installing the wiper arm with wiper blade
and setting its final setting”, page 129
⇒ “3.2 Removing and installing windscreen wiper motor”,
page 130
⇒ “3.3 Replacing and adjusting the spray nozzle. ”, page 131

3.1 Removing and installing the wiper arm


with wiper blade and setting its final set‐
ting
Special tools and workshop equipment required
♦ Extractor for wiper arms - T10369/1-
Removing
– Unclip the cap -1- from the retaining tabs and fold down.
– Carefully push out the nozzle -2- -arrow- (not valid for Space‐
back type).
– Release the fixing nut by one turn.

– Place an M6 nut -2- on the fixing nut (does not apply to Space‐
back model).
– Using a standard commercially available small two-arm ex‐
tractor -1-, undo the wiper arm -3- from the shaft.
– Unscrew nut and remove wiper arm.
Installing
– When the ignition is switched on, switch wiper motor on and
off and run until it is in park position.
– Position wiper arm with wiper blade and loosely secure with
nuts.
– Set final position of wiper arm in accordance with the figure.
The value -a- is:

Rapid 42±2 mm

3. Rear window wiper and washer system 129


Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 02.2018

Rapid Spaceback
Version -I- 183±2 mm
Version -II- 52±2 mm
– Tighten the fixing nuts.
– Perform a functional and setting check.
Tightening torques
Fixing nuts for wiper arms 12 Nm

3.2 Removing and installing windscreen


wiper motor
Removing
– Switch off the ignition and all electrical consumers!
– Remove wiper arm with wiper blade
⇒ “3.1 Removing and installing the wiper arm with wiper blade
and setting its final setting”, page 129 .
Rapid:
– Lever the cover -1- out of the catches and remove.
Rapid Spaceback:
– Remove the tailgate trim panel.

– Remove rivets -2-, unclip cover -1- -arrows- and remove.

130 Rep. gr.92 - Windscreen wash/wipe system


Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 02.2018

All vehicles:
– Unplug connector -3- at wiper motor.
– To unlock, turn the locking clip at the hose connection and
detach hose -2- for spray nozzle.
– Unscrew nuts -arrows- and remove wiper motor -1-.
Installing
Installation is performed in the reverse order, pay attention to the
following points:
– Take fitting position of implementation into account:

Rapid:
– Recess in the rear window implementation-arrow- is located
at the bottom, from the inside.

Rapid Spaceback:
– The recess in the rear window implementation -arrow- is lo‐
cated at the top, from the outside.
– Set end position of wiper arm with wiper blade
⇒ “3.1 Removing and installing the wiper arm with wiper blade
and setting its final setting”, page 129 .
Tightening torques
Fixing nuts for wiper arms 7 Nm

3.3 Replacing and adjusting the spray noz‐


zle.
⇒ “3.3.1 Replacing and adjusting the spray nozzle - Rapid”, page
131
⇒ “3.3.2 Replacing and adjusting the spray nozzle - Rapid Space‐
back”, page 132

3.3.1 Replacing and adjusting the spray noz‐


zle - Rapid

Note

If the spray field is uneven due to impurities within the spray noz‐
zle, remove the spray nozzle and clean it with water against the
spraying direction. Purging the nozzle with compressed air
against the spraying direction is then permitted. Do not use any
objects for cleaning spray jets!

3. Rear window wiper and washer system 131


Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 02.2018

Remove nozzle
– Unclip the cap -1- from the retaining tabs and fold down.
– Carefully push out the nozzle -2- -arrow-.
Installing
– Run wiper until it is in park position, insert the spray nozzle in
the correct position in the wiper motor shaft and subsequently
adjust ⇒ Maintenance ; Booklet Rapid .

3.3.2 Replacing and adjusting the spray noz‐


zle - Rapid Spaceback

Note

If the spray field is uneven due to impurities within the spray noz‐
zle, remove the spray nozzle and clean it with water against the
spraying direction. Purging the nozzle with compressed air
against the spraying direction is then permitted. Do not use any
objects for cleaning spray jets!

Remove nozzle
– Remove lamp for high level brake light
⇒ “7.1.2 Removing and installing the high level brake light -
Rapid Spaceback”, page 167 .
– Unlock the latches -arrows- and remove the spray nozzle -1-
out of the light towards the rear.
Installing
Installation is performed in the reverse order, pay attention to the
following points:
– Press the nozzle into the assembly opening until it audibly
locks into place.
Check proper operation after installing.

Note

The nozzle is not configured. If the spray field is uneven due to


impurities within the spray nozzle, remove the spray nozzle and
clean it with water against the spraying direction. Purging the
nozzle with compressed air against the spraying direction is then
permitted. Do not use any objects for cleaning spray jets!

132 Rep. gr.92 - Windscreen wash/wipe system


Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 02.2018

4 Headlamp cleaning system


Summary of components - components of the headlight washing
system ⇒ Electronic Catalogue of Original Parts“ETKA” .
⇒ “4.1 Removing and installing headlight cleaning system pump
V11 ”, page 133
⇒ “4.2 Removing and installing the lift cylinder for spray nozzles
of headlight”, page 133
⇒ “4.3 Bleed the headlamp cleaning system”, page 133

4.1 Removing and installing headlight


cleaning system pump - V11-
The removal and installation of the pump is described in
⇒ “1 Windscreen washer system”, page 116 .
After installing the pump bleed the headlamp cleaning system
⇒ “4.3 Bleed the headlamp cleaning system”, page 133 .

4.2 Removing and installing the lift cylinder


for spray nozzles of headlight
– Pull the spray nozzles with cover slightly out of the bumper by
uniformly gripping on both sides of the cover, then grip the
spray nozzles and pull out up to the stop.
– Unclip the cover -1- from the bearing -arrows-.
– Remove front bumper ⇒ Body Work; Rep. gr. 63 .

– Press off the catches arrows -A- using a small screwdriver and
push the lift cylinder -1- out of the bumper arrow -B-.
Installing
Installation is performed in the reverse order, pay attention to the
following points:
– Push the lift cylinder into the brackets in the bumper until it
clicks audibly into place.
– Hoses with angled pieces must click audibly into the connec‐
tions on the lift cylinders for spray nozzles.
– Install bumper.
– After completing the assembly work bleed the headlamp
cleaning system
⇒ “4.3 Bleed the headlamp cleaning system”, page 133 .

4.3 Bleed the headlamp cleaning system


After installation or for initial setup, the headlamp cleaning system
must be bled to guarantee a perfect operation.
– Fill washer fluid reservoir and headlight washer reservoir.

4. Headlamp cleaning system 133


Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 02.2018

– Start engine.
– Switch on headlight.
– Operate headlamp cleaning system several times (3 -5 pulses
for an operating duration of each 3 s).
– If necessary repeat this bleeding procedure until a perfect
functioning of the lift cylinders for headlamp cleaning system
and for spray nozzles is achieved.

134 Rep. gr.92 - Windscreen wash/wipe system


Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 02.2018

94 – Lights, bulbs, switches - exterior


1 Headlights – halogen headlights
⇒ “1.1 Summary of components, halogen headlight”, page 135
⇒ “1.2 Removing and installing headlight”, page 138
⇒ “1.3 Replacing light bulbs in headlights”, page 139
⇒ “1.4 Removing and installing headlight range control motor”,
page 143
⇒ “1.5 Replace headlight fixing brackets”, page 144
⇒ “1.6 Removing and installing LED module”, page 144
⇒ “1.7 Change headlight for right-hand and/or left-hand traffic”,
page 145
⇒ “1.8 Setting the headlight beam”, page 146

1.1 Summary of components, halogen


headlight
⇒ “1.1.1 Summary of components, halogen headlights up to CW
21/2017”, page 135
⇒ “1.1.2 Summary of components - halogen headlights mounted
up to CW 22/2017”, page 137

1.1.1 Summary of components, halogen headlights up to CW 21/2017

1. Headlights – halogen headlights 135


Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 02.2018

1 - Headlight housing
❑ Removing and installing
⇒ “1.2 Removing and in‐
stalling headlight”,
page 138
❑ Adjust
⇒ “1.8 Setting the head‐
light beam”, page 146
❑ Replace attachment
brackets
⇒ “1.5 Replace head‐
light fixing brackets”,
page 144
❑ Change headlights for
right-hand and/or left-
hand traffic
⇒ “1.7 Change headlight
for right-hand and/or
left-hand traffic”,
page 145
2 - Light bulb for low beam light
❑ H7
❑ Replace
⇒ “1.3.1 Replacing H7
bulb for low beam light”,
page 139
3 - Rubber cap
4 - Headlight range control mo‐
tor
❑ Removing and installing
⇒ “1.4 Removing and in‐
stalling headlight range
control motor”,
page 143
5 - Plastic cap
6 - Rubber cap
7 - Light bulb for daylight driving light and main beam
❑ H15
❑ Replace ⇒ “1.3.2 Replacing H15 bulb for daylight driving light and main beam”, page 140
8 - Light bulb for the parking light
❑ W5W
❑ Replace ⇒ “1.3.4 Replacing W5W bulb for parking light”, page 142
9 - Clamping device
10 - Light bulb for the turn signal light
❑ PY21W
❑ Replace ⇒ “1.3.5 Replacing PY21W bulb for turn signal light”, page 143

136 Rep. gr.94 - Lights, bulbs, switches - exterior


Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 02.2018

1.1.2 Summary of components - halogen headlights mounted up to CW 22/2017

1 - Bolts
❑ 1.5 Nm
2 - Cover
3 - LED module
❑ Controls the daytime
running light and park‐
ing light function
❑ Removing and installing
⇒ “1.6 Removing and in‐
stalling LED module”,
page 144
4 - Bolts
❑ 3.5 Nm
5 - Hollow screw
❑ Adjusting element for
exact position adjust‐
ment of the headlight in
the body
6 - Headlight housing
❑ Removing and installing
⇒ “1.2 Removing and in‐
stalling headlight”,
page 138
❑ Adjust
⇒ “1.8 Setting the head‐
light beam”, page 146
❑ Replace attachment
brackets
⇒ “1.5 Replace head‐
light fixing brackets”,
page 144
❑ No headlight adjust‐
ment for right or left traf‐
fic
7 - Headlight range control motor
❑ Removing and installing ⇒ “1.4 Removing and installing headlight range control motor”, page 143
8 - Light bulb for low beam light
❑ H7
❑ Replace ⇒ “1.3.1 Replacing H7 bulb for low beam light”, page 139
9 - Rubber cap
10 - Plastic cap
11 - Lamp socket for the turn signal light
12 - Light bulb for the turn signal light
❑ PY21W
❑ Replace ⇒ “1.3.5 Replacing PY21W bulb for turn signal light”, page 143
13 - Rubber cap
14 - Light bulb for main beam
❑ H7
❑ Replace ⇒ “1.3.3 Replacing bulb for main beam H7 ”, page 141

1. Headlights – halogen headlights 137


Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 02.2018

1.2 Removing and installing headlight


Removing

Note

♦ The procedure for removal and installing illustrates the left


headlight as an example. The procedure for removal and in‐
stalling is identical for the right headlight.
♦ For an easier fitting of the headlight, mark its position in a suit‐
able manner (e.g. with marker, adhesive tape) before slack‐
ening the screws.

– Switch off the ignition and all electrical consumers!


– Remove front bumper ⇒ Body Work; Rep. gr. 63 .
– Unscrew screws -arrows-.
– Disconnect plug and remove headlight -1-.
Installing
Installation is performed in the reverse order, pay attention to the
following points:
– Align the headlight according to the contours of the vehicle
body (maintain the gap size ⇒ Body Repairs; Rep. gr. 00 ) and
loosely tighten with screws.
– Install bumper.

– By turning -arrows- the setting elements -A-, the headlight is


moved and thereby fitted to the surrounding body parts.
– Subsequently tighten the fixing screws -B- and then the screw
-C-.

Note

The setting element is aligned automatically when tightening the


screw -C-.

– Set up the headlight


⇒ “1.8 Setting the headlight beam”, page 146 .
Tightening torques
Headlight fixing screws 3.5 Nm

138 Rep. gr.94 - Lights, bulbs, switches - exterior


Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 02.2018

1.3 Replacing light bulbs in headlights


⇒ “1.3.1 Replacing H7 bulb for low beam light”, page 139
⇒ “1.3.2 Replacing H15 bulb for daylight driving light and main
beam”, page 140
⇒ “1.3.3 Replacing bulb for main beam H7 ”, page 141
⇒ “1.3.4 Replacing W5W bulb for parking light”, page 142
⇒ “1.3.5 Replacing PY21W bulb for turn signal light”, page 143

1.3.1 Replacing “H7” bulb for low beam light

WARNING

These H7 bulbs are pressurised and can explode when chang‐


ing the bulb - risk of injury! Wear gloves and safety spectacles
when changing the lamps.

Note

♦ Do not touch the glass when changing the light bulb. The re‐
maining finger print would evaporate through the heat of the
switched on bulb and condense on the reflector, which impairs
the luminosity of the headlight.
♦ When installing the rubber cap, pay attention to the correct
fitting. Water ingress destroys the headlight.
♦ Switch off the ignition and all electrical components before
changing the bulb.
♦ On vehicles with diesel engines, the fuel filter and its holder
must be removed and placed to the side in order to facilitate
an easier access to the right bulb. Do not separate the hoses.
♦ The cover in the wheelhouse liner can also be removed in or‐
der to facilitate an easier access to the bulb.

Removing
– Remove rubber cap for headlight -2-.

1. Headlights – halogen headlights 139


Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 02.2018

– Release and remove the bulb -1- from the catches by pendular
movement and pulling force -arrows-.
– Disconnect plug connection -2-.
Installing
Installation is carried out in the reverse order.

1.3.2 Replacing “H15” bulb for daylight driving


light and main beam

WARNING

These H15 bulbs are pressurised and can explode when


changing the bulb - risk of injury! Wear gloves and safety spec‐
tacles when changing the lamps.

Note

♦ Do not touch the glass when changing the light bulb. The re‐
maining finger print would evaporate through the heat of the
switched on bulb and condense on the reflector, which impairs
the luminosity of the headlight.
♦ When installing the rubber cap, pay attention to the correct
fitting. Water ingress destroys the headlight.
♦ Switch off the ignition and all electrical components before
changing the bulb.

Removing
– Left side - remove the battery to get better access to the bulb
⇒ “1.6 Removing and installing battery”, page 13 .
– Remove rubber cap for headlight -1-.

140 Rep. gr.94 - Lights, bulbs, switches - exterior


Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 02.2018

– Turn the bulb -1- to the left -arrow- and remove from the head‐
light housing.
Installing
Installation is carried out in the reverse order.

1.3.3 Replacing bulb for main beam “H7”

WARNING

These H7 bulbs are pressurised and can explode when chang‐


ing the bulb - risk of injury! Wear gloves and safety spectacles
when changing the lamps.

Note

♦ Do not touch the glass when changing the light bulb. The re‐
maining finger print would evaporate through the heat of the
switched on bulb and condense on the reflector, which impairs
the luminosity of the headlight.
♦ When installing the rubber cap, pay attention to the correct
fitting. Water ingress destroys the headlight.
♦ Switch off the ignition and all electrical components before
changing the bulb.

Removing
– Remove rubber cap for headlight -1-.

1. Headlights – halogen headlights 141


Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 02.2018

– Release and remove the bulb -1- from the catches by pendular
movement and pulling force -arrows-.
– Disconnect plug connection -2-.
Installing
Installation is carried out in the reverse order.

1.3.4 Replacing “W5W” bulb for parking light

Note

♦ Do not touch the glass bulb with bare hands when changing
the bulb, use clean material gloves. The remaining finger print
would evaporate through the heat of the switched on bulb and
condense on the reflector, which impairs the luminosity of the
headlight.
♦ When installing the rubber cap, pay attention to the correct
fitting. Water ingress destroys the headlight.
♦ Switch off the ignition and all electrical components before
changing the bulb.

Removing
– Remove rubber cap -1-.

– Slacken the bulb holder -1- by pendular movement and pulling


force -arrow-.
– Remove the bulb from the socket.
Installing
– After replacing the bulb, press socket fully into the headlight.
– Position rubber cap.

142 Rep. gr.94 - Lights, bulbs, switches - exterior


Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 02.2018

1.3.5 Replacing “PY21W” bulb for turn signal


light

Note

♦ Do not touch the glass bulb with bare hands when changing
the bulb, use clean material gloves. The remaining finger print
would evaporate through the heat of the switched on bulb and
condense on the reflector, which impairs the luminosity of the
headlight.
♦ Switch off the ignition and all electrical components before
changing the bulb.

Removing
– Turn the socket -4- towards the left and remove.
– Replace defective light bulb.
Installing
Installation is carried out in the reverse order.

1.4 Removing and installing headlight range


control motor
Removing
– Remove headlight with defective control motor
⇒ “1.2 Removing and installing headlight”, page 138 .
– Turn the cover to the left -3- and remove, also remove the
cover -1- for purposes of presentation.

1. Headlights – halogen headlights 143


Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 02.2018

– Detach the control motor -1- by turning it to the left in direction


of arrow -A- (left headlight), or to the right (right headlight).
– Disconnect plug.
– Slide thrust piece -2- out of the support by tilting it out to the
side in direction of arrow -B- and remove the control motor
-1- in direction of arrow -C-.
Installing
Installation is performed in the reverse order, pay attention to the
following points:

Note

When installing the caps, pay attention to the correct fitting. Water
ingress destroys the headlight.

– Inspect proper operation.


– Adjust headlight ⇒ Maintenance ; Booklet Rapid .

1.5 Replace headlight fixing brackets


If the outer headlight fixing brackets are broken or damaged, they
can be replaced by installing the repair kit. The complete head‐
light must not be replaced.

Note

♦ Before repairs check if the headlight has no other damage, as


the repair would be senseless.
♦ The replacement brackets can be ordered separately see ⇒
Electronic Catalogue of Original Parts “ETKA” .
♦ Before repairs the headlight must be removed.
♦ After installing the headlight, adjust the headlight
⇒ “1.8 Setting the headlight beam”, page 146 .

– Remove the original headlight fixing bracket, in order to install


a new fixing bracket from the repair kit -see fig.-.
– Insert a new bracket -arrows- in the correct way and tighten
the fixing screws.
Tightening torques
Fixing screws for bracket 1.5 Nm

1.6 Removing and installing LED module


Controls the daytime running light and parking light function.
Removing
– Switch off the ignition and all electrical consumers!

144 Rep. gr.94 - Lights, bulbs, switches - exterior


Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 02.2018

– Remove screws -arrows- and cover with LED module -1- from
the headlamp, taking into account the connected cable
lengths.
– Release connector and pull it off.

– Unscrew the screws, arrows -A- and LED module -1- From the
detents, arrows -B-.
Installing
Installation is carried out in the reverse order.

1.7 Change headlight for right-hand and/or


left-hand traffic
The halogen headlights should have self-adhesive foil glued over
them when driving in countries which drive on the right or the left
thereby preventing blinding of the drivers travelling in the opposite
direction.

Note

♦ For vehicles from CW 22/2017 there is no headlamp adjust‐


ment for right and left traffic, see
⇒ “1.1.2 Summary of components - halogen headlights moun‐
ted up to CW 22/2017”, page 137 .
♦ The change of the headlights is not suitable for the permanent
mode, rather only as a brief “touristic” solution during a tem‐
porary journey abroad.
♦ Both headlights must always be changed.
♦ The lenses must be cleared of dirt and de-greased, e.g. with
degreased white spirit solution, before sticking the foil.
♦ When cleaning and gluing foils, the lens must remain cold for
safety reasons.
♦ The instructions “right” and/or “left” on the protective foils al‐
ways refer to the front visibility towards the outside.
♦ Ensure that the correct protective foil is chosen, see ⇒ Elec‐
tronic Catalogue of Original Parts“ETKA” .

– Remove the rear protective foil.


– Place the foil on the headlight in such a way that the lower and
outer vertical edge of the auxiliary part of the foil is offset with
the bottom edge of the lens and the vertical auxiliary contour
on the headlight panes, see Fig.

1. Headlights – halogen headlights 145


Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 02.2018

1- The headlight on the right


2- The headlight on the left
Left-hand drive:

Right-hand drive:
– Forcefully press on the middle area of the foil -B-.
– Carefully pull off the auxiliary part of the foil -A- from the head‐
light.
Only the non-transparent part of the protective foil remains on the
lens -B-.

Note

Inform the customer about the corresponding notes for removing


the residual adhesive after pulling off the protective foil, e.g. tex‐
tiles soaked in isopropyl alcohol (do not use any aggressive
solvent, which can damage the polycarbonate lenses).

1.8 Setting the headlight beam

Note

Use a headlight beam setting device for setting the headlight


beam. The nominal values and the adjustment procedure can be
found in the Manual ⇒ Maintenance ; Booklet Rapid .

146 Rep. gr.94 - Lights, bulbs, switches - exterior


Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 02.2018

2 Headlights with Xenon discharge


lamps
⇒ “2.1 Summary of components, headlights with Xenon discharge
lamps”, page 147
⇒ “2.2 Removing and installing headlight”, page 150
⇒ “2.3 Replacing light bulbs and gas discharge lamps”,
page 150
⇒ “2.4 Replace attachment brackets”, page 154
⇒ “2.5 Removing and installing headlight range control motor”,
page 155
⇒ “2.6 Removing and installing the power output module for head‐
light”, page 157
⇒ “2.7 Removing and installing LED module”, page 157
⇒ “2.8 Change headlight for right-hand and/or left-hand traffic”,
page 158
⇒ “2.9 Setting the headlight beam”, page 159

2.1 Summary of components, headlights


with Xenon discharge lamps
⇒ “2.1.1 Assembly overview, headlights with xenon discharge
lamps up to CW 21/2017”, page 147
⇒ “2.1.2 Assembly overview, headlights with xenon discharge
lamps from CW 22/2017”, page 149

2.1.1 Assembly overview, headlights with xenon discharge lamps up to CW


21/2017

2. Headlights with Xenon discharge lamps 147


Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 02.2018

1 - Light bulb for the parking


light
❑ W5W BV (blue glass)
❑ Replace
⇒ “2.3.3 Replacing the
light bulb for the parking
light W5W BV (blue
glass)”, page 152
2 - Rubber cap
3 - Light bulb for daylight driv‐
ing light and main beam
❑ H15
❑ Replace
⇒ “2.3.2 Replacing H15
bulb for daylight driving
light and main beam”,
page 151
4 - Cover
5 - Headlight range control mo‐
tor
❑ Removing and installing
⇒ “2.5.1 Removing and
installing the control mo‐
tor for headlamp range
control, up to CW
22/2017”, page 155
6 - Gas discharge lamp with in‐
tegrated ignition coil
❑ D5S
❑ Replace
⇒ “2.3.1 Replacing the
D5S gas discharge
lamp”, page 150
7 - Cover
8 - Headlight housing
❑ Adjust ⇒ “1.8 Setting the headlight beam”, page 146
❑ Removing and installing ⇒ “1.2 Removing and installing headlight”, page 138
❑ Replace attachment brackets ⇒ “2.4 Replace attachment brackets”, page 154
❑ Change headlights for right-hand and/or left-hand traffic
⇒ “2.8 Change headlight for right-hand and/or left-hand traffic”, page 158
9 - Light bulb for the turn signal light
❑ PY21W
❑ Replace ⇒ “2.3.4 Replacing PY21W bulb for turn signal light”, page 153
10 - Clamping device

148 Rep. gr.94 - Lights, bulbs, switches - exterior


Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 02.2018

2.1.2 Assembly overview, headlights with xenon discharge lamps from CW


22/2017

1 - Bolts
❑ 3.5 Nm
2 - Hollow screw
❑ Adjusting element for
exact position adjust‐
ment of the headlight in
the body
3 - Cover for adjustment ele‐
ment
❑ no spare part
4 - Screw
❑ 1.5 Nm
5 - Setting element
❑ no spare part
6 - Headlight housing
❑ Adjust
⇒ “1.8 Setting the head‐
light beam”, page 146
❑ Removing and installing
⇒ “1.2 Removing and in‐
stalling headlight”,
page 138
❑ Replace attachment
brackets
⇒ “2.4 Replace attach‐
ment brackets”,
page 154
❑ Change headlights for
right-hand and/or left-
hand traffic
⇒ “2.8 Change headlight
for right-hand and/or
left-hand traffic”,
page 158
7 - LED module Volkswagen Technical Site: http://vwts.ru http://vwts.info
❑ Controls the daytime running light, parking light and flashlight function
❑ Removing and installing ⇒ “2.7 Removing and installing LED module”, page 157
8 - Bolts
❑ 1.5 Nm
9 - Gas discharge lamp with integrated ignition coil
❑ D5S
❑ Replace ⇒ “2.3.1 Replacing the D5S gas discharge lamp”, page 150
10 - Bolts
❑ 1.5 Nm
11 - Holder for actuator
12 - Headlight range control motor
❑ Removing and installing
⇒ “2.5.2 Removing and installing the control motor for headlamp range control - as of CW 22/2017”, page
155

2. Headlights with Xenon discharge lamps 149


Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 02.2018

13 - Bolts
❑ 1.5 Nm
14 - Plastic cap
15 - Bolts
❑ 1.5 Nm
16 - Power module for headlights
❑ Removing and installing
⇒ “2.6 Removing and installing the power output module for headlight”, page 157

2.2 Removing and installing headlight


Assembly work is similar to that for halogen headlights
⇒ “1.2 Removing and installing headlight”, page 138 .

2.3 Replacing light bulbs and gas discharge


lamps
⇒ “2.3.1 Replacing the D5S gas discharge lamp”, page 150
⇒ “2.3.2 Replacing H15 bulb for daylight driving light and main
beam”, page 151
⇒ “2.3.3 Replacing the light bulb for the parking light W5W BV
(blue glass)”, page 152
⇒ “2.3.4 Replacing PY21W bulb for turn signal light”, page 153

2.3.1 Replacing the “D5S” gas discharge


lamp

WARNING

Observe use and safety instructions for gas discharge lamps


⇒ Electrical System – general notes; Rep. gr. 94 . If a note
cannot be accessed, open the Workshop Manual “Electrical
System - General Notes” manually in “ELSA”, Section “94”.
The D5S discharge lamp is pressurised and can explode when
changing the bulb - risk of injury! Wear gloves and safety spec‐
tacles when changing the lamps.

Note

♦ Do not touch the glass when changing the light bulb. The re‐
maining finger print would evaporate through the heat of the
switched on bulb and condense on the reflector, which impairs
the luminosity of the headlight.
♦ When installing the cover, pay attention to the correct fitting.
Water ingress destroys the headlight.
♦ Switch off the ignition and all electrical components before
changing the bulb.

Removing
– Remove headlight
⇒ “1.2 Removing and installing headlight”, page 138 .
– Unscrew the screws -arrows- and remove the cover -1-.

150 Rep. gr.94 - Lights, bulbs, switches - exterior


Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 02.2018

Variant 1:

Variant 2:
– Release connector and pull it off.

– Turn locking straps -1- in direction of arrow -A-.


– Carefully remove the gas discharge lamp -2- in direction of
arrow -B-.
Installing
Installation is performed in the reverse order, pay attention to the
following points:
– After the installation adjust the headlight.

Note

Use a headlight beam setting device for setting the headlight


beam. The nominal values and the adjustment procedure can be
found in the Manual ⇒ Maintenance ; Booklet Rapid .

Tightening torques
Fixing screws for gas discharge lamp 1.5 Nm
cover

2.3.2 Replacing “H15” bulb for daylight driving


light and main beam

WARNING

These H15 bulbs are pressurised and can explode when


changing the bulb - risk of injury! Wear gloves and safety spec‐
tacles when changing the lamps.

2. Headlights with Xenon discharge lamps 151


Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 02.2018

Note

♦ Do not touch the glass when changing the light bulb. The re‐
maining finger print would evaporate through the heat of the
switched on bulb and condense on the reflector, which impairs
the luminosity of the headlight.
♦ When installing the rubber cap, pay attention to the correct
fitting. Water ingress destroys the headlight.
♦ Switch off the ignition and all electrical components before
changing the bulb.

Removing
– Left side - remove the battery to get better access to the bulb
⇒ “1.6 Removing and installing battery”, page 13 .
– Remove rubber cap for headlight -2-.

– Turn the bulb -1- to the left -arrow- and remove from the head‐
light housing.
Installing
Installation is carried out in the reverse order.

2.3.3 Replacing the light bulb for the parking


light “W5W BV” (blue glass)

Note

♦ Do not touch the glass bulb with bare hands when changing
the bulb, use clean fabric gloves. The remaining finger print
would evaporate through the heat of the switched on bulb and
condense on the reflector, which impairs the luminosity of the
headlight.
♦ When installing the rubber cap, pay attention to the correct
fitting. Water ingress destroys the headlight.
♦ Switch off the ignition and all electrical components before
changing the bulb.

152 Rep. gr.94 - Lights, bulbs, switches - exterior


Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 02.2018

Removing
– Remove rubber cap -1-.

– Slacken the bulb holder -1- by pendular movement and pulling


force -arrow-.
– Remove the bulb from the socket.
Installing
– After replacing the bulb, press socket fully into the headlight.
– Position rubber cap.

2.3.4 Replacing “PY21W” bulb for turn signal


light

Note

♦ Do not touch the glass bulb with bare hands when changing
the bulb, use clean fabric gloves. The remaining finger print
would evaporate through the heat of the switched on bulb and
condense on the reflector, which impairs the luminosity of the
headlight.
♦ Switch off the ignition and all electrical components before
changing the bulb.

Removing
– Turn the socket -4- towards the left and remove.
– Replace defective light bulb.
Installing
Installation is carried out in the reverse order.

2. Headlights with Xenon discharge lamps 153


Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 02.2018

2.4 Replace attachment brackets


If the outer headlight fixing brackets are broken or damaged, they
can be replaced by installing the repair kit. The complete head‐
light must not be replaced.

Note

♦ Before repairs check if the headlight has no other damage, as


the repair would be senseless.
♦ The replacement brackets can be ordered separately see ⇒
Electronic Catalogue of Original Parts “ETKA” .
♦ Before repairs the headlight must be removed.
♦ After installing the headlight, adjust the headlight
⇒ “1.8 Setting the headlight beam”, page 146 .

Screw adjusting nut into the new bracket:


Before attaching to the headlight housing, the adjusting screw
-2- must be screwed into the new bracket -1-.
The adjusting screw is designed to tap the thread in the new
bracket.
The adjusting screw must be screwed into the bracket exactly
straight, otherwise there is a risk that the new bracket will break.
To screw the adjusting screw -2- into the new bracket -1- accu‐
rately, use e.g. the vice jaws. (Use e.g. the hex socket -4- from
the tool set for support on one side. On the other side, use e.g. a
piece of pipe, a washer, or screw etc. Pos. -3-.
Slowly screw the adjusting screw into the new bracket, which
slowly tightening the vice jaws (a second mechanic is required for
this step).
Replace the original bracket with a new bracket:
– Remove the remains of the original crate.
– Change the contact surface (grind off, remove by file) to allow
a new bracket to be inserted properly.

– Install a new bracket -arrows- with adjusting screw already


tightened flush to the profile and tighten the fixing screws.
Tightening torques
Fixing screws for bracket 1.5 Nm

154 Rep. gr.94 - Lights, bulbs, switches - exterior


Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 02.2018

2.5 Removing and installing headlight range


control motor
⇒ “2.5.1 Removing and installing the control motor for headlamp
range control, up to CW 22/2017”, page 155
⇒ “2.5.2 Removing and installing the control motor for headlamp
range control - as of CW 22/2017”, page 155

2.5.1 Removing and installing the control mo‐


tor for headlamp range control, up to CW
22/2017
Removing
– Remove headlight with defective control motor
⇒ “1.2 Removing and installing headlight”, page 138 .
– Turn the cover to the left -3- and remove, also remove the
cover -2- for purposes of presentation.

– Detach the control motor -1- by turning it to the left in direction


of arrow -A- (left headlight), or to the right (right headlight).
– Disconnect plug.
– Slide thrust piece -2- out of the support by tilting it out to the
side in direction of arrow -B- and remove the control motor
-1- in direction of arrow -C-.
Installing
Installation is performed in the reverse order, pay attention to the
following points:

Note

When installing the caps, pay attention to the correct fitting. Water
ingress destroys the headlight.

– Inspect proper operation.


– Adjust headlight ⇒ Maintenance ; Booklet Rapid .

2.5.2 Removing and installing the control mo‐


tor for headlamp range control - as of
CW 22/2017
Removing
– Remove headlight with defective control motor
⇒ “1.2 Removing and installing headlight”, page 138 .

2. Headlights with Xenon discharge lamps 155


Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 02.2018

– Unscrew screws -arrows- and remove cover -1-.


– To get better access, remove the gas discharge lamp
⇒ “2.3.1 Replacing the D5S gas discharge lamp”, page 150 .

– Remove the screw -arrow-, cover -3- and the adjusting ele‐
ment -2-.

– Remove screws-arrows- and push the actuator pressure bolt


out of the mounting.
– Remove the actuator -1- with holder -2- from the headlight.
– Release connector and pull it off.

156 Rep. gr.94 - Lights, bulbs, switches - exterior


Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 02.2018

– Turn the actuator -2- in the direction of the arrow -A- and in the
direction of the arrow -B- Remove from the holder -1-.
Installing
Installation is performed in the reverse order, pay attention to the
following points:

Note

When installing the cover, pay attention to the correct fitting. Wa‐
ter ingress destroys the headlight.

– Inspect proper operation.


– Adjust headlight ⇒ Maintenance ; Booklet Rapid .

2.6 Removing and installing the power out‐


put module for headlight
Removing
– Remove headlight
⇒ “1.2 Removing and installing headlight”, page 138 .
– Unscrew the screws -arrows- and remove the control unit -1-.
Installing
Installation is performed in the reverse order, pay attention to the
following points:

Note

♦ Correctly install the seal when installing the control unit. Water
ingress destroys the headlight.
♦ Check headlights and adjust if necessary ⇒ Maintenance ;
Booklet Rapid .

Tightening torques
♦ ⇒ “2.1.2 Assembly overview, headlights with xenon discharge
lamps from CW 22/2017”, page 149

2.7 Removing and installing LED module


Special tools and workshop equipment required
♦ ESD workstation - VAS6613-

Caution

Work on the LED module exclusively at an ESD workstation.

2. Headlights with Xenon discharge lamps 157


Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 02.2018

ESD workstation - VAS6613- structure


1- Plug adapter for earthing module
2- Earthing module
3- ESD table mat
4- Wrist tape
Removing
– Remove headlight
⇒ “1.2 Removing and installing headlight”, page 138 .

– Unscrew the screws -arrows- and remove the LED module


-1-.
Installing
Installation is performed in the reverse order, pay attention to the
following points:

Note

Correctly install the seal when installing the control unit. Water
ingress destroys the headlight.

Tightening torques
♦ ⇒ “2.1.2 Assembly overview, headlights with xenon discharge
lamps from CW 22/2017”, page 149

2.8 Change headlight for right-hand and/or


left-hand traffic
The headlight inner aperture should be switched over when driv‐
ing in countries which drive on the right or the left thereby pre‐
venting blinding of the drivers travelling in the opposite direction.
The change is identical for both headlights.
Work procedure
– Switch off the ignition and all electrical consumers!
– Unplug the connector from the headlight.
– Unscrew screws -arrows- and remove the gas discharge lamp
cover -1-.

Note

To make access to the screws for the gas discharge lamp cover
easier, you can also remove the cap in the wheelhouse liner.

– Push the lever -1- downwards -arrow-.

158 Rep. gr.94 - Lights, bulbs, switches - exterior


Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 02.2018

The headlight on the left:

The headlight on the right:


– Reinstall cover for gas discharge lamp.

Note

When installing the caps, pay attention to the correct fitting. Water
ingress destroys the headlight.

Tightening torques
Fixing screws for gas discharge lamp 1.5 Nm
cover

2.9 Setting the headlight beam

Note

Use a headlight beam setting device for setting the headlight


beam. The nominal values and the adjustment procedure can be
found in the Manual ⇒ Maintenance ; Booklet Rapid .

2. Headlights with Xenon discharge lamps 159


Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 02.2018

3 Side turn signal in the wing


⇒ “3.1 Removing and installing side turn signal in the wing”, page
160

3.1 Removing and installing side turn signal


in the wing
Removing

Note

The catch peg -arrow- is positioned at the front right or front left
of the vehicle.

– Switch off the ignition and all electrical consumers!


– Unscrew 4 screws -4- from wheelhouse liner.
– Press the turn signal light with the hand from inside.
– Pull the housing -1- out of its socket -3-.
– Light bulb -2- can now also be pulled out for replacing.
Installing
Installation is carried out in the reverse order.

Note

The housing of the turn signal light -1- must lock in place in the
wing.

Tightening torques
Fixing screw for wheelhouse liner 1 Nm

160 Rep. gr.94 - Lights, bulbs, switches - exterior


Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 02.2018

4 Lights in the exterior mirror


⇒ “4.1 Removing and installing the turn signal light in the exterior
mirror”, page 161
⇒ “4.2 Removing and installing signal bulb in exterior mirror L131 /
L132 ”, page 161

4.1 Removing and installing the turn signal


light in the exterior mirror
Removing
– Switch off the ignition and all electrical consumers!
– Remove mirror glass ⇒ Body Work; Rep. gr. 66 .
– Push off catches -arrows-, tilt out the cover -1- a little and re‐
move by moving it upwards.

– Remove socket with bulb -1- -arrow-.

– Unscrew screw -1-, tilt out the turn signal light -2- a little
-arrow- and remove.
Installing
Installation is performed in the reverse order, pay attention to the
following points:
– Performing functional tests of all functions.

4.2 Removing and installing signal bulb in


exterior mirror -L131- / -L132-
♦ Bulb WY5W

4. Lights in the exterior mirror 161


Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 02.2018

Removing
– Switch off the ignition and all electrical consumers!
– Remove mirror glass ⇒ Body Work; Rep. gr. 66 .
– Push off catches -arrows-, tilt out the cover -1- a little and re‐
move by moving it upwards.

– Remove socket with bulb -1- -arrow-.


– Push off defective light bulb WY5W from the socket and re‐
place.
Installing
Installation is performed in the reverse order, pay attention to the
following points:
– Performing functional tests of all functions.

162 Rep. gr.94 - Lights, bulbs, switches - exterior


Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 02.2018

5 Tail lights
⇒ “5.1 Removing and installing tail light”, page 163
⇒ “5.2 Replacing the light bulbs of the tail light”, page 163

5.1 Removing and installing tail light


Removing
– Switch off the ignition and all electrical consumers!
– Insert the assembly tool - T10389- or a hook for wheel trim
caps into the opening of the cover -1-, unclip the cover
-arrow- from the catches -2- in sequence and remove.

– Unscrew bolts -3-.


– Take hold of the light -1- and release it carefully from the as‐
sembly opening in the installed axle by moving it laterally
-arrow-.
– Unlock and pull off connector -2-.
Installing
Installation is performed in the reverse order, pay attention to the
following points:

Note

Pay attention to the correct fitting and undamaged seals.

Caution

When inserting the lights into the assembly opening, ensure


that the connection wiring loom is inserted into the vehicle
cockpit.
Crushed cables between the body and lights causes significant
leakage of rainwater and light malfunctions.

Tightening torques
Fixing screws for tail light 2.5 Nm

5.2 Replacing the light bulbs of the tail light


– Remove tail light
⇒ “5.2 Replacing the light bulbs of the tail light”, page 163 .
– Slacken and remove the lamp holder from the retaining tabs
-arrows- (not valid when replacing the bulb for the parking light
-Pos. 2-, when removing the bulb holder, turn it to the left and
take it out).

5. Tail lights 163


Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 02.2018

Rapid:

Rapid Spaceback:

– Replace defective light bulb.


1- Brake and parking light - twin filament light bulb P21/4W
2- Parking light - light bulb W3W
3- Turn signal light - light bulb PY21W
4- Fog and parking light - twin filament light bulb P21/4W (fog
light only lights up on driver's side)
5- Reversing light - light bulb P21W

164 Rep. gr.94 - Lights, bulbs, switches - exterior


Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 02.2018

6 Registration number lighting


⇒ “6.1 Removing and installing licence plate carrier”, page 165
⇒ “6.2 Replacing bulb for the number plate light”, page 165

6.1 Removing and installing licence plate


carrier
Removing
– Switch off the ignition and all electrical consumers!
– Use a suitable screwdriver -arrow- to lever the light -1- out of
the tailgate.

– Disconnect the plug -1- from the light -2-.


Installing
Installation is performed in the reverse order, pay attention to the
following points:
– The plug -1- is located on the right vehicle side.
– Perform a functional test.

6.2 Replacing bulb for the number plate light

Note

♦ LEDs are used for lighting in the Top scope of equipment.


♦ LEDs cannot be replaced separately.

– Switch off the ignition and all electrical consumers!


– Remove number plate light
⇒ “6.1 Removing and installing licence plate carrier”,
page 165 .

6. Registration number lighting 165


Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 02.2018

– Replace the defective light bulb -1- (W5W).


– After installing, perform a functional test.

166 Rep. gr.94 - Lights, bulbs, switches - exterior


Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 02.2018

7 Additional brake light


⇒ “7.1 Removing and installing high level brake light”, page 167

7.1 Removing and installing high level brake


light
⇒ “7.1.1 Removing and installing the high level brake light - Rap‐
id”, page 167
⇒ “7.1.2 Removing and installing the high level brake light - Rapid
Spaceback”, page 167

7.1.1 Removing and installing the high level


brake light - Rapid
Removing
– Switch off the ignition and all electrical consumers!
– Consecutively press the retaining tabs in direction of arrow
-A- and detach the cover -2- from the light housing -1- in di‐
rection of arrow -B-.

– Pinch the retaining tabs in the direction of arrow -A- and pull
the brake light -1- in the direction of arrow -B- out of the sup‐
port.
– Separate electrical plug connection -2-.
Installing
Installation is carried out in the reverse order.

Note

The light strip is fitted with LEDs, which cannot be replaced indi‐
vidually. In the event of a fault, the brake light must be replaced
completely.

7.1.2 Removing and installing the high level


brake light - Rapid Spaceback

Caution

When using the lever tool, mask points where the lever tool is
applied using commercially available adhesive tape.

Special tools and workshop equipment required


♦ Disassembly wedge - T10383- , if necessary, plastic spatula

7. Additional brake light 167


Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 02.2018

Removing
– Switch off the ignition and all electrical consumers!
– Attach a strip of commercially available adhesive tape -1- to
the area of the rear lid above the bulb for the additional brake
light.

– Insert the assembly wedge - T10383- (vehicles with glued


spoiler, use plastic spatula) -1- in stages from the top right
corner between bulb for additional brake light - M25- -2- and
rear lid.

– Release the catches of the bulb for additional brake light -


M25- successively by pushing the assembly wedge in direc‐
tion of travel. Work from right to left.
– Pull light out of tailgate, taking connected wire lengths into ac‐
count.

168 Rep. gr.94 - Lights, bulbs, switches - exterior


Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 02.2018

– Unlock and disconnect hose connection -1-.


– Unlock and disconnect plug connection -2- and remove light.
Installing
Installation is performed in the reverse order, pay attention to the
following points:

Note

When installing the additional brake light bulb - M25- , ensure the
seal is seated correctly. Make sure that the seal is undamaged
and that no loops are formed.

– Mount plug.
– Connect hose connection for spray jet. Ensure correct locking
by pulling slightly on the connection.
– Press lamp for high level brake light, starting from the bottom
edge, into the assembly opening until it audibly locks into
place.
– Check the function of the lamp for high level brake light - M25-
and of the rear window spray nozzle.

7. Additional brake light 169


Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 02.2018

8 Fog lights, fog lights with “Corner”


function and daylight driving light
⇒ “8.1 General description, fault recognition and fault display”,
page 170
⇒ “8.2 Removing and installing fog light”, page 170
⇒ “8.3 Adjusting the fog light”, page 171
⇒ “8.4 Replacing light bulb for fog light”, page 171

8.1 General description, fault recognition


and fault display
General description
Two types of fog lights are installed:
♦ Fog lights
♦ the fog lights with the static cornering light (Corner)
As of CW 22.2015, the LED module for the daylight driving light
is part of the fog light (depending on vehicle equipment) and can‐
not be changed separately.
Fog lights with the “Corner” function ensure that the surrounding
area of the vehicle is better illuminated when turning, parking etc.
and are controlled by the onboard supply control unit - J519- .
Further information and description of function ⇒ Owner's manual
Rapid .
Fault recognition and fault display
The onboard supply control unit - J 519- is equipped with self-
diagnosis, which facilitates fault finding.
Use the ⇒ Vehicle diagnostic tester in the function “Targeted fault
finding” for checking and fault finding of the fog lights with the
“Corner” function.

8.2 Removing and installing fog light


Removing
Vehicles without ScoutLine package:
– For example, insert an assembly tool - T10389- or a hook for
the wheel trim caps (tool kit) into the opening in the grid
-top arrow- and unclip the grids -1- from the catches in se‐
quence and remove.

170 Rep. gr.94 - Lights, bulbs, switches - exterior


Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 02.2018

Vehicles fitted with ScoutLine package:


– Unscrew bolts -2-.

– E.g. hook a puller -2- from the tool kit or an assembly tool -
T10389- into the opening, arrow -C- in the cover -1-.
– Loosen and remove the cover -1- by pulling on the assembly
tool in direction of arrow -A- and -B-.
All vehicles:

– Unscrew screws -arrows-.


– Remove the fog light.
– Disconnect plug.
Installing
Installation is performed in the reverse order, pay attention to the
following points:
Tightening torques
Fixing screws for fog light cover 1 Nm
Fixing screws for fog lights 1.5 Nm

8.3 Adjusting the fog light

Note

Use a headlight beam setting device for setting the headlight


beam. The nominal values and the adjustment procedure can be
found in the Manual ⇒ Maintenance ; Booklet Rapid .

8.4 Replacing light bulb for fog light

WARNING

These H8 bulbs are pressurised and can explode when chang‐


ing the bulb - risk of injury! Wear gloves and safety spectacles
when changing the lamps.

8. Fog lights, fog lights with “Corner” function and daylight driving light 171
Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 02.2018

Note

Do not touch the glass when installing the light bulb. Your fingers
will leave traces of grease on the glass which then evaporate
when the bulb is switched on causing it to cloud.

– Switch off the ignition and all electrical consumers!


– Remove fog light
⇒ “8.2 Removing and installing fog light”, page 170 .
– Turn socket with lamp in -direction of arrow- and remove.
– Replace defective light bulb.
– Installation is carried out in the reverse order.

172 Rep. gr.94 - Lights, bulbs, switches - exterior


Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 02.2018

9 Entry and start authorisation


⇒ “9.1 Installation overview - entry and start authorisation”, page
173
⇒ “9.2 Install and remove interior aerial 1 for entry and start sys‐
tem R138 ”, page 174
⇒ “9.3 Install and remove aerial in luggage compartment for entry
and start system R137 ”, page 175
⇒ “9.4 Install and remove aerial in rear bumper for entry and start
system R136 ”, page 175
⇒ “9.5 Control unit for keyless entry authorisation”, page 176
⇒ “9.6 Connection assignment of the connector on the control unit
for keyless entry authorisation”, page 177

9.1 Installation overview - entry and start authorisation


There are two equipment variants of entry and start authorisation
(KESSY):
♦ GO KESSY
♦ FULL KESSY

Note

GO KESSY variant - without aerials and sensors in the door handles (Pos. 3 and 9), must be unlocked/locked
with the remote control, see ⇒ Rapid Owner's Manual .

9. Entry and start authorisation 173


Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 02.2018

1 - Aerial
❑ under the rear bumper
❑ Removing and installing
⇒ “9.4 Install and re‐
move aerial in rear
bumper for entry and
start system R136 ”,
page 175
2 - Aerial
❑ Aerial in the middle of
the luggage compart‐
ment
❑ Removing and installing
⇒ “9.3 Install and re‐
move aerial in luggage
compartment for entry
and start system R137 ”,
page 175
3 - Aerial and sensors
❑ in the outer door handle
on the driver's side
❑ Basic equipment Start
❑ in the case of a fault, re‐
place the complete door
handle ⇒ Body Work;
Rep. gr. 58
4 - Start/stop button - E408-
❑ Removing and installing
⇒ “2.9 Removing and in‐
stalling starter button
E408 ”, page 211
5 - Immobiliser reader coil - D2-
❑ Removing and installing
⇒ “2.9 Removing and in‐
stalling starter button
E408 ”, page 211
6 - Steering lock with control unit for electronic steering column lock - J764- (ESCL)
❑ Removing and installing ⇒ “10.5.2 Removing and installing the electronic steering lock”, page 186
7 - Interface for entry and start system - J965-
❑ next to the glove compartment on front passenger side
❑ Removing and installing ⇒ “9.5 Control unit for keyless entry authorisation”, page 176
8 - Aerial
❑ under the centre console in the centre
❑ Removing and installing
⇒ “9.2 Install and remove interior aerial 1 for entry and start system R138 ”, page 174
9 - Aerial and sensors
❑ in the outer door handle on the front passenger side
❑ in the case of a fault, replace the complete outer door handle ⇒ Body Work; Rep. gr. 58

9.2 Install and remove interior aerial 1 for


entry and start system - R138-
The aerial is glued in place on both sides under the handbrake
with adhesive tape underneath the floor covering.

174 Rep. gr.94 - Lights, bulbs, switches - exterior


Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 02.2018

Removing
– Switch off the ignition and all electrical consumers!
– Remove the centre console ⇒ Body Work; Rep. gr. 68 .
– Loosen the antenna -1- with a lever (e.g. -T10236- ) or by hand
and disconnect the plug.
Installing
– Connect the plug and glue the antenna back to its original in‐
stallation location with double-sided adhesive tape -2-, see
Fig.
Further installation occurs in reverse order.

9.3 Install and remove aerial in luggage


compartment for entry and start system
- R137-
The aerial Is located behind the rear seats underneath the floor
covering in the middle.
Removing
– Switch off the ignition and all electrical consumers!
– Fold down the rear seats and raise the floor covering in the
luggage compartment.
– Remove the connector -1- and carefully pull off the aerial -2-
from the bearing in the bodyshell, e.g. with the removal tool for
the lining of the door panel -T10236- .
Installing
– Fit connector and press the straddling dowels for aerial into
the assembly openings.

9.4 Install and remove aerial in rear bumper


for entry and start system - R136-
The aerial can be found on the bodyshell, in the middle under the
rear bumper.
Removing
– Switch off the ignition and all electrical consumers!
– Remove rear bumper ⇒ Body Work; Rep. gr. 63 .

9. Entry and start authorisation 175


Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 02.2018

– Press off catch pegs -arrows-, tilt aerial -1- up and push it out.
– Disconnect plug.
Installing
Installation is carried out in the reverse order.

9.5 Control unit for keyless entry authorisa‐


tion
The control unit is located in the storage compartment in the dash
panel on the front passenger side.
Removing
– Switch off the ignition and all electrical consumers!
– Remove the side vent from the dash panel on the driver's side
⇒ Rep. gr. 87 ; Air guide .
– Remove the side cover on the dash panel -1- on the front pas‐
senger side in -direction of arrow-.

– Unclip the unit -1- with mounting bracket -2- -arrows- and, tak‐
ing into account the connected lines.

Volkswagen Technical Site: http://vwts.ru http://vwts.info

176 Rep. gr.94 - Lights, bulbs, switches - exterior


Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 02.2018

– Disconnect plug connection -3- by unlocking and tilting out the


clamp.
– Swivel out the unit -1- and remove from the mounting bracket
-2- -arrows-.
Installing
Installation is performed in the reverse order, pay attention to the
following points:
– If the control unit has been replaced, code using ⇒ Vehicle
diagnostic tester. The ⇒ Vehicle diagnostic tester must be
connected and online.
– Test the complete system for proper operation.

9.6 Connection assignment of the connec‐


tor on the control unit for keyless entry
authorisation
The connection assignment for the multi-pin connector can be
found in ⇒ Current flow diagrams, Electrical fault finding and Fit‐
ting locations.

9. Entry and start authorisation 177


Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 02.2018

10 Switch unit on the steering column


⇒ “10.1 Summary of components - switch unit on the steering
column”, page 178
⇒ “10.2 Removing and installing steering column combination
switch”, page 181
⇒ “10.3 Removing and installing return ring with slip ring from
steering column combination switch”, page 184
⇒ “10.4 Adjusting centre position for return ring with slip ring”,
page 185
⇒ “10.5 Removing and installing steering lock housing”,
page 186
⇒ “10.6 Removing and installing lock cylinder”, page 186
⇒ “10.7 Removing and installing ignition/starter switch”,
page 187
⇒ “10.8 Contact assignment on the ignition starter switch”,
page 189
⇒ “10.9 Removing and installing ignition key anti-removal lock
solenoid N376 ”, page 189

10.1 Summary of components - switch unit


on the steering column
⇒ “10.1.1 Switch unit on the steering column with mechanical
steering lock”, page 178
⇒ “10.1.2 Switch unit on the steering column with Control unit for
electronic steering column trim panel J764 ”, page 180

10.1.1 Switch unit on the steering column with mechanical steering lock

178 Rep. gr.94 - Lights, bulbs, switches - exterior


Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 02.2018

1 - Shear bolt
❑ for steering lock housing
❑ 2 pieces
2 - Magnet for ignition key anti-
removal lock - N376-
❑ only on vehicles with au‐
tomatic gearbox
❑ Removing and installing
⇒ “10.9 Removing and
installing ignition key
anti-removal lock sole‐
noid N376 ”, page 189
3 - Ignition key
4 - Lock cylinder
❑ Removing and installing
⇒ “10.6 Removing and
installing lock cylinder”,
page 186
❑ with immobilizer reader
coil - D2-
5 - Steering column combina‐
tion switch - E595-
❑ Removing and installing
⇒ “10.2 Removing and
installing steering col‐
umn combination
switch”, page 181
6 - Restoring ring with slip ring
❑ Removing and installing
⇒ “10.3 Removing and
installing return ring with
slip ring from steering
column combination
switch”, page 184
7 - Screw
❑ 3 pieces
❑ 1.1 Nm
8 - Ignition starter switch - D-
❑ Removing and installing ⇒ “10.7 Removing and installing ignition/starter switch”, page 187
9 - Steering lock housing
❑ Removing and installing ⇒ “10.5.1 Removing and installing the mechanical steering lock”, page 186
10 - Steering column

10. Switch unit on the steering column 179


Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 02.2018

10.1.2 Switch unit on the steering column with Control unit for electronic steering
column trim panel - J764-

1 - Start/stop button - E408-


❑ Removing and installing
⇒ “2.9 Removing and in‐
stalling starter button
E408 ”, page 211
2 - Ignition key
3 - Immobiliser reader coil - D2-
❑ Removing and installing
⇒ “2.9 Removing and in‐
stalling starter button
E408 ”, page 211
4 - Steering column combina‐
tion switch - E595-
❑ Removing and installing
⇒ “10.2.2 Removing and
installing steering col‐
umn combination switch
- installed as of CW
22.2015”, page 182
5 - Restoring ring with slip ring
❑ Removing and installing
⇒ “10.3 Removing and
installing return ring with
slip ring from steering
column combination
switch”, page 184
6 - Screw
❑ 3 pieces
❑ 1.1 Nm
7 - Steering lock with control
unit for electronic steering col‐
umn lock - J764- (ESCL)
❑ Removing and installing
⇒ “10.5.2 Removing and
installing the electronic steering lock”, page 186
8 - Steering column
9 - Shear bolt
❑ for steering lock housing
❑ 2 pieces

180 Rep. gr.94 - Lights, bulbs, switches - exterior


Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 02.2018

10.2 Removing and installing steering col‐


umn combination switch
⇒ “10.2.1 Removing and installing steering column combination
switch - installed up to CW 21.2015”, page 181
⇒ “10.2.2 Removing and installing steering column combination
switch - installed as of CW 22.2015”, page 182

10.2.1 Removing and installing steering col‐


umn combination switch - installed up to
CW 21.2015
Removing
– Disconnect battery earth strap
⇒ “1.3 Disconnecting and reconnecting battery”, page 10 .
– Remove steering wheel ⇒ Body Work; Rep. gr. 69 .

Note

♦ The steering wheel must be in its central position (wheels in


straight ahead position) before removing the steering column.
♦ There is no positioning pin present on the return ring, which
would lock it against inadvertent twisting after removing the
steering wheel.

– Remove top and bottom steering column trim panel; make


sure that the return ring -2- is not twisted out of position ⇒
Body Work; Rep. gr. 70 .
– Lock return ring with slip ring with transport lock -3- or with
adhesive tape in centre position (connector -1- must be hori‐
zontal at top).

10. Switch unit on the steering column 181


Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 02.2018

– Unscrew bolt -4-.


– Disconnect plug connections -1-, -3- and -5-.
– Slide combination switch -6- with return ring -2- off the steering
column -arrows-.
– If necessary remove return ring -2- with slip ring
⇒ “10.3 Removing and installing return ring with slip ring from
steering column combination switch”, page 184 .
Installing
Installation is performed in the reverse order, pay attention to the
following points:
– When removing, the wheels must be in the straight ahead po‐
sition.
– Return ring with slip ring must be in the centre position.

Note

In case of doubt that the return ring is in the centre position, set
the centre position of the return ring
⇒ “10.4 Adjusting centre position for return ring with slip ring”,
page 185 .

– Slide on the combination switch until the stop on the steering


wheel rod is reached.
– Guide the tensioning screw -4- correctly into the assembly
opening.
– Do not forget to remove the adhesive tape or the transport
security from the return ring before installing the steering
wheel.
– Observe correct mounting sequence of steering wheel and
airbag ⇒ Body Work; Rep. gr. 69 .
Tightening torques
Fixing screw for combination switch, Pos. 1 Nm
-4-

10.2.2 Removing and installing steering col‐


umn combination switch - installed as of
CW 22.2015
Removing
– Disconnect battery earth strap
⇒ “1.3 Disconnecting and reconnecting battery”, page 10 .
– Remove steering wheel ⇒ Body Work; Rep. gr. 69 .

Note

♦ The steering wheel must be in its central position (wheels in


straight ahead position) before removing the steering column.
♦ There is no positioning pin present on the return ring, which
would lock it against inadvertent twisting after removing the
steering wheel.

182 Rep. gr.94 - Lights, bulbs, switches - exterior


Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 02.2018

– Remove top and bottom steering column trim panel; make


sure that the return ring -2- is not twisted out of position ⇒
Body Work; Rep. gr. 70 .
– Lock return ring with slip ring with transport lock -3- or with
adhesive tape in centre position (connector -1- must be hori‐
zontal at top).

– Unlock and disconnect connector -2- from return ring -1-.

– Release and disconnect connector -2- from switch -1- on left.

– Release and disconnect connector -2- from switch -1- on right.

10. Switch unit on the steering column 183


Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 02.2018

– Press off catches -2- in -direction of arrow- and move switch


-1- from the steering column slightly.

– Press off bottom catch -2- in -direction of arrow- and move out
switch -1- from the steering column.
Installing
Installation is performed in the reverse order, pay attention to the
following points:
– When removing, the wheels must be in the straight ahead po‐
sition.
– Return ring with slip ring must be in the centre position.

Note

In case of doubt that the return ring is in the centre position, set
the centre position of the return ring
⇒ “10.4 Adjusting centre position for return ring with slip ring”,
page 185 .

– Slide on the combination switch until the stop on the steering


wheel rod is reached.
– Do not forget to remove the adhesive tape or the transport
security from the return ring before installing the steering
wheel.
– Observe correct mounting sequence of steering wheel and
airbag ⇒ Body Work; Rep. gr. 69 .

10.3 Removing and installing return ring with


slip ring from steering column combina‐
tion switch

Note

♦ Vehicles with ESP and/or with corner light and fog lights with
the “corner light” function (static cornering light) are addition‐
ally fitted with the steering angle sender - G85- , which is
integrated together with the slip ring in one housing. The as‐
sembly work is identical for both types of return rings.
♦ When removing the return ring, the combination switch must
not be removed from the steering column.

Removing
– Disconnect battery earth strap
⇒ “1.3 Disconnecting and reconnecting battery”, page 10 .
– Remove steering wheel ⇒ Body Work; Rep. gr. 69 .

184 Rep. gr.94 - Lights, bulbs, switches - exterior


Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 02.2018

Note

♦ The steering wheel must be in its central position (wheels in


straight ahead position) before removing the steering column.
♦ There is no positioning pin present on the return ring, which
would lock it against inadvertent twisting after removing the
steering wheel.

– Remove top and bottom steering column trim panel; make


sure that the return ring -1- is not twisted out of position ⇒
Body Work; Rep. gr. 70 .
– Lock return ring with transport lock -2- or with adhesive tape
in centre position.
– Disconnect plug connection -3-.
– Unscrew screws -arrows- and remove return ring -1- from
combination switch.
Installing
Installation is performed in the reverse order, pay attention to the
following points:
– Move the lever of the turn signal light in Neutral so that the
release pin does not break off when installing.
– When replacing return rings with integrated steering angle
sender - G85- , perform basic setup with ⇒ Vehicle diagnostic
tester.
Tightening torques
Fixing screws for return ring with slip ring 1 Nm
(-arrows-).

10.4 Adjusting centre position for return ring


with slip ring
It is only carried out if there is a doubt about the correct setting of
the centre position for the return ring rotor.
Work procedure
– Put the front wheels in straight ahead position.
– Slowly turn the ring rotor -2- manually to the left up to the stop.
– Turn the ring rotor -2- by approx. 2.5 turns to the right so that
the connector -1- at the top is in horizontal position (look in the
left inspection hole next to the connector in order to check the
correct adjustment of the slip ring).
– Install steering wheel ⇒ Body Work; Rep. gr. 69 , if necessary
lock ring rotor with transport security -3- or adhesive tape.

10. Switch unit on the steering column 185


Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 02.2018

10.5 Removing and installing steering lock


housing
⇒ “10.5.1 Removing and installing the mechanical steering lock”,
page 186
⇒ “10.5.2 Removing and installing the electronic steering lock”,
page 186

10.5.1 Removing and installing the mechanical


steering lock
The instructions for removing and installing the mechanical steer‐
ing lock can be found under ⇒ Chassis; Rep. gr. 48 .

10.5.2 Removing and installing the electronic


steering lock
The instructions for removing and installing the electronic steering
lock can be found under ⇒ Chassis; Rep. gr. 48 .

10.6 Removing and installing lock cylinder


Removing

Note

Before the steering wheel is removed from the shaft, the front
wheels must be brought into the straight ahead position.

– Disconnect battery earth strap


⇒ “1.3 Disconnecting and reconnecting battery”, page 10 .
– Remove steering wheel ⇒ Body Work; Rep. gr. 69 .
– Removing top and bottom steering column trim ⇒ Body Work;
Rep. gr. 70 .
– Carefully disconnect the plug connection -arrow- of the reader
coil for the vehicle immobiliser on the lock cylinder.

Note

The reader coil for the vehicle immobiliser is fixed to the lock cyl‐
inder and cannot be replaced separately.

– Insert ignition key into lock cylinder and turn in such a way that
the marking on the reader coil -1- is opposite the hole in the
lock cylinder -2-.
– Insert steel cable (about ∅ 1.2 mm) into the hole -2- next to
the key.

186 Rep. gr.94 - Lights, bulbs, switches - exterior


Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 02.2018

– Use the steel cable -2- to unlock the securing lever -3- of the
lock cylinder -arrow- and pull the lock cylinder with the inserted
key out of the steering lock housing.

WARNING

Risk of blocking the steering lock!


The steering lock must not be moved without the lock cylinder,
otherwise it would block.

Note

The blocked steering lock must be replaced

Installing
– Insert ignition key into the lock cylinder, turn and insert steel
cable (see removal).
– Insert lock cylinder into the steering lock housing.

Note

♦ Please ensure when inserting the lock cylinder that the con‐
nection for the reader coil of the vehicle immobiliser is lying in
the guideway for the steering lock housing.
♦ If the lock cylinder with the reader coil including the key was
replaced, adapt immobiliser with ⇒ Vehicle diagnostic tester.

– Fit the connector together on the reading coil for immobiliser.


– Installing top and bottom steering column trim ⇒ Body Work;
Rep. gr. 70 .
– Observe correct mounting sequence of steering wheel and
airbag ⇒ Body Work; Rep. gr. 69 .
– Follow the work procedure when connecting the battery
⇒ “1.3 Disconnecting and reconnecting battery”, page 10 .

10.7 Removing and installing ignition/starter


switch
Two small e.g. watch screwdriver ∅ 2 mm must be used for re‐
moval. Tools must be made from welding / steel wire ∅ 2 mm as
follows:

10. Switch unit on the steering column 187


Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 02.2018

– At one end of a ∅ 2 mm welded/steel wire, bend a loop and


cut to length -a-.
• Dimension -a- = approx. 65 mm
– File the end of the wire hook from one end until sharp.
• Dimension -b- = 5 mm.
Removing
– Disconnect battery earth strap
⇒ “1.3 Disconnecting and reconnecting battery”, page 10 .
– Remove steering wheel ⇒ Body Work; Rep. gr. 69 .
– Removing top and bottom steering column trim ⇒ Body Work;
Rep. gr. 70 .
– Turn the ignition key in the position Ignition “ON”.
– Disconnect plug from ignition starter switch -1-.
– Insert tools / screwdrivers into the holes as follows -arrows-.

Variant 1:

Variant 2:
Both variants:

188 Rep. gr.94 - Lights, bulbs, switches - exterior


Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 02.2018

Note

♦ The hole on the plug is covered with a sticker that needs to be


removed.
♦ When inserting the tools / screwdrivers -1- (for tool tips, see
fig.), -B- rest lightly on the tools / screwdrivers in the direction
of the arrow -A-.

– After inserting the tools / screwdriver -1- until the stop, the
locking lugs -3- are unlocked.
– Remove the ignition switch in direction of arrow -C- (tools /
screwdrivers must remain plugged in when removing the ig‐
nition starter switch).
Installing
Installation is performed in the reverse order, pay attention to the
following points:

Note

♦ When installing, the ignition starter switch and the lock cylinder
must be in the same position, e.g. “Ignition ON”.
♦ Observe correct mounting sequence of steering wheel and
airbag ⇒ Body Work; Rep. gr. 69 .

– Insert ignition starter switch into the steering lock until there is
an audible click.
– Follow the work procedure when connecting the battery
⇒ “1.3 Disconnecting and reconnecting battery”, page 10 .

10.8 Contact assignment on the ignition start‐


er switch
1- Terminal 15
2- Terminal 30
3- Terminal 50
4- Terminal P - not assigned
5- Terminal 86s
6- Terminal 75
7- Terminal 30

10.9 Removing and installing ignition key an‐


ti-removal lock solenoid - N376-
Removing
– Disconnect battery earth strap
⇒ “1.3 Disconnecting and reconnecting battery”, page 10 .
– Remove steering wheel ⇒ Body Work; Rep. gr. 68 .

10. Switch unit on the steering column 189


Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 02.2018

Note

Before the steering wheel is removed from the shaft, the front
wheels must be brought into the straight ahead position.

– Removing top and bottom steering column trim ⇒ Body Work;


Rep. gr. 68 .

WARNING

Risk of damage to the electronic components caused by elec‐


trostatic charge.
Before removing the connector, the mechanic must discharge
himself by briefly making contact with e.g. the door bolts.

– Disconnect plug connection -2-.


– Push off the catch in direction of arrow -A- and remove the
ignition key anti-removal lock solenoid -1- in direction of arrow
-B- from the steering lock housing -3-.
Installing
Installation is performed in the reverse order, pay attention to the
following points:
– Perform a functional test.

190 Rep. gr.94 - Lights, bulbs, switches - exterior


Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 02.2018

11 Parking aid
⇒ “11.1 Assembly overview - parking aid”, page 191
⇒ “11.2 Removing and installing the parking aid control unit J446
”, page 192
⇒ “11.3 Removing and installing the rear parking aid warning
buzzer H15 ”, page 193
⇒ “11.4 Removing and installing the front parking aid warning
buzzer H22 ”, page 193
⇒ “11.5 Removing and installing rear parking aid senders”,
page 194
⇒ “11.6 Removing and installing front parking aid sender”,
page 195
⇒ “11.7 Parking aid sender holder - assignment, fitting location,
gluing procedure, drilling of holes”, page 196
⇒ “11.8 Self-diagnosis of the parking aid”, page 197

11.1 Assembly overview - parking aid

Note

♦ Summary of details for the components ⇒ Electronic Cata‐


logue of Original Parts “ETKA” .
♦ Description of the system and the function see ⇒ Owner's
manual Rapid .

11. Parking aid 191


Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 02.2018

1 - Front parking aid warning


buzzer - H22-
❑ to the side of the relay
carrier
❑ Removing and installing
⇒ “11.4 Removing and
installing the front park‐
ing aid warning buzzer
H22 ”, page 193
2 - Button for parking aid
❑ Removing and installing
⇒ “2.4 Removing and in‐
stalling switches in cen‐
tre console of the dash
panel”, page 208
3 - Front parking aid sender
❑ Removing and installing
⇒ “11.6 Removing and
installing front parking
aid sender”, page 195
4 - Rear parking aid sender
❑ Removing and installing
⇒ “11.5 Removing and
installing rear parking
aid senders”, page 194
5 - Control unit for the parking
aid - J446-
❑ under the left side trim
panel in luggage com‐
partment
❑ Removing and installing
⇒ “11.2 Removing and
installing the parking aid
control unit J446 ”, page
192
6 - Rear parking aid warning buzzer - H15-
❑ under the top trim panel of left B-pillar
❑ Removing and installing
⇒ “11.3 Removing and installing the rear parking aid warning buzzer H15 ”, page 193

11.2 Removing and installing the parking aid


control unit - J446-

Note

You can find the contact assignment in ⇒ Current flow diagrams,


Electrical fault finding and Fitting locations.

Removing
– Switch off the ignition and all electrical consumers!
– Remove left side trim panel in luggage compartment ⇒ Body
Work; Rep. gr. 70 .

192 Rep. gr.94 - Lights, bulbs, switches - exterior


Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 02.2018

– Unscrew nuts -arrows- and take out parking aid control unit
-1-.
– Unlock and pull off connector -2-.
Installing
Installation is performed in the reverse order, pay attention to the
following points:
If the control unit for the parking aid - J446- is replaced:
– Code the control unit ⇒ Vehicle diagnostic tester.
Tightening torques
Fixing nuts for control unit for the parking 2 Nm
aid - J446- (-arrows-)

11.3 Removing and installing the rear parking


aid warning buzzer - H15-
Removing
– Switch off the ignition and all electrical consumers!
– Remove top B-pillar trim panel on left ⇒ Body Work; Rep. gr.
70 .
– Remove plastic button rivets -arrows-.
– Disconnect plug.
Installing
Installation is carried out in the reverse order.

11.4 Removing and installing the front park‐


ing aid warning buzzer - H22-
The warning buzzer is located next to the relay carrier.
Removing
– Switch off the ignition and all electrical consumers!
– Remove the side vent from the dash panel on the driver's side
⇒ Heating, Air Conditioning; Rep. gr. 80 .

11. Parking aid 193


Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 02.2018

– Remove the side cover on the dash panel -1- on the driver's
side in -direction of arrow-.

Insert your hand to the side of the dash panel and slide the warn‐
ing buzzer -1- out of the mounting to the side of the relay carrier
-arrow-.
– Disconnect plug connection -2-.
Installing
Installation is carried out in the reverse order.

11.5 Removing and installing rear parking aid


senders

Note

♦ The visible area of a new sender must be painted in the colour


of the bumper before installing.
♦ The parking aid senders must only be painted with a max. 100
µm thick layer of paint. Before painting the sender, the rear
parts of the sender (terminal connection) must be affixed.
♦ Only the upper part (visible part) of the sender membrane is
painted.
♦ To make it easier to remove the retaining tabs in direction of
arrow -A-, you can use a larger pair of pliers for Seeger rings
with bent jaws.

Removing
– Switch off the ignition and all electrical consumers!
– Remove rear bumper ⇒ Body Work; Rep. gr. 63 .

194 Rep. gr.94 - Lights, bulbs, switches - exterior


Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 02.2018

– Pull out the retaining lugs on the sender holder in direction of


arrow -A-.
– Press out the sender on the outer side of the shock absorber
inwards.
– Disconnect plug.
Installing
Installation is performed in the reverse order, pay attention to the
following points:
– Press the sender into the holder until the catches click audibly.

11.6 Removing and installing front parking


aid sender

Note

♦ Senders fitted in painted areas – the visible area of a new


sender must be painted in the colour of the bumper before
installing.
♦ The parking aid senders must only be painted with a max. 100
µm thick layer of paint. Before painting the sender, the rear
parts of the sender (terminal connection) must be affixed.
♦ Only the upper part (visible part) of the sender membrane is
painted.
♦ To make it easier to remove the catches -arrow A- you can use
a larger set of circlip pliers with bent jaws.

Removing
– Switch off the ignition and all electrical consumers!
– Remove the front sender-bumper attached to the middle of the
vehicle ⇒ Body Work; Rep. gr. 63 .
– Remove the sender-fog light installed at the edge of the bump‐
er ⇒ “8.2 Removing and installing fog light”, page 170 .
– Remove retaining lugs arrows -A-.
– Press out the sender -1- on the outer side of the shock ab‐
sorber inwards.
– Disconnect plug connection -2-.
Installing
Installation is performed in the reverse order, pay attention to the
following points:
– Press the sender into the holder until the catches click audibly.

11. Parking aid 195


Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 02.2018

11.7 Parking aid sender holder - assignment,


fitting location, gluing procedure, drilling
of holes
⇒ “11.7.1 Assignment of the sender holder”, page 196
⇒ “11.7.2 Fitting position of the sender holders”, page 196
⇒ “11.7.3 Gluing procedure of the sender holders”, page 197
⇒ “11.7.4 Drilling holes for sender holder”, page 197

11.7.1 Assignment of the sender holder


The sender holders are different in shape and must be assigned
to the relevant fitting location. The inner and outer sender holders
are not identical see ⇒ Electronic Catalogue of Original Parts
“ETKA” .

11.7.2 Fitting position of the sender holders


Front bumper:
– The correct fitting position is determined by the lug on the
holder, arrow -A- and the contour of the holder on the bumper
and/or the cylinder lug, arrow -B-.

Rear bumper:

196 Rep. gr.94 - Lights, bulbs, switches - exterior


Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 02.2018

The correct fitting position is determined by the cylinder lug


-arrow- on the sender holder and/or the lug on the holder -2- and
the contour of the holder on the bumper -1-.

11.7.3 Gluing procedure of the sender holders


– Clean and thoroughly degrease the marked adhesive area
-1- with isopropyl (technical alcohol).
– Evenly apply agent to improve adhesion of the plastic (e.g. D
822 150 A1 - see ⇒ Electronic Catalogue of Original Parts
“ETKA” ) in the marked adhesive area -1-.
– Let the activator dry off for approx. 5 min.

Note

♦ Pay attention to the fitting position


⇒ “11.7.2 Fitting position of the sender holders”, page 196 and
the assignment of the sender holders
⇒ “11.7.1 Assignment of the sender holder”, page 196 .
♦ A centering pin must be used for precisely centering the holder
in the bumper or gluing the holder with inserted parking aid
sender on which the decoupling ring (black silicone ring) is
placed.
♦ The application force and the application time determine the
durability of the bonding!

– Remove the protective foils from both sides of the adhesive


tape and press the sender holder -2- into the front bumper for
approx. 10 seconds while applying high force.

11.7.4 Drilling holes for sender holder


The procedure for drilling holes in the bumper for the sender
holder can be found in the ⇒ Body Work - fitting locations; Rep.
gr. 63 .

11.8 Self-diagnosis of the parking aid


The parking aid system is equipped with self-diagnosis. Carry out
“self-diagnosis” with the ⇒ Vehicle diagnostic tester in the function
“Targeted fault finding”.

11. Parking aid 197


Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 02.2018

12 Rear view camera


⇒ “12.1 General description”, page 198
⇒ “12.2 Summary of components - rear view camera”,
page 198
⇒ “12.3 Removing and installing handle with rear view camera”,
page 199
⇒ “12.4 Removing and installing the rear view camera spray noz‐
zle”, page 200

12.1 General description


The rear view camera helps the driver during the rear view driving.
This works by showing the driver an image of the traffic situation
behind the vehicle in the radio navigation system monitor.
When the ignition is switched on or the engine is running, the
system will switch on by putting the gear into reverse when the
radio navigation system is switched off.

Note

♦ When handling a fault it is absolutely essential to know the


function and operation of the rear view camera.
♦ Additional information and description of function ⇒ Rapid
Owner's Manual .
♦ Calibration of the rear view camera is not necessary.
♦ The rear view camera image does not appear on the radio
navigation system until after a full system start. Like a com‐
puter, the radio navigation system needs a few seconds for
the system to start after being switched on.

The rear view camera consists of the following parts:


♦ Rear view camera - R189-
♦ Control unit with display unit for radio and navigation system
- J503-

12.2 Summary of components - rear view camera

198 Rep. gr.94 - Lights, bulbs, switches - exterior


Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 02.2018

1 - Control unit with display for


radio and navigation system -
J503-
❑ Removing and installing
⇒ “3.4 Removing and in‐
stalling the Infotainment
display/control unit”,
page 74
2 - Rear view camera - R189-
❑ firmly connected with
the grip strip
❑ Removing and installing
handle with rear view
camera
⇒ “12.3 Removing and
installing handle with
rear view camera”, page
199
❑ Equipped with spray
nozzle for camera lens
from CW 22.2016
❑ Removing and installing
spray nozzle
⇒ “12.4 Removing and
installing the rear view
camera spray nozzle”,
page 200

12.3 Removing and installing handle with


rear view camera
The rear view camera - R189- is installed in the handle button of
the rear lid and is firmly connected to the handle button.
The grip strip must be replaced when replacing the rear view
camera.
Removing
– Switch off the ignition and all electrical consumers!
– Remove the bottom tailgate trim panel ⇒ Body Work; Rep. gr.
70 .
– Disconnect the hose for the spray nozzle of the rear view cam‐
era.

12. Rear view camera 199


Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 02.2018

– Release the grip with the camera -1- from the catches
-arrows- step by step and remove.
– Unlock and disconnect the connector of the rear view camera.
Installing
Installation is performed in the reverse order, pay attention to the
following points:
– Press the grip with the camera on the concealed frame step
by step (starting from the left side and left rear tab) into the
assembly opening until the catch pegs click audibly into place.
– Perform a functional test.

12.4 Removing and installing the rear view


camera spray nozzle
Removing
– Remove rear view camera
⇒ “12.3 Removing and installing handle with rear view cam‐
era”, page 199 .
– Unlock spray nozzle -1- -arrow-.
– Pull spray nozzle -1- out of the rear view camera -2-.
Installing
Installation is performed in the reverse order, pay attention to the
following points:
– Perform a functional test.

200 Rep. gr.94 - Lights, bulbs, switches - exterior


Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 02.2018

96 – Lights, bulbs, switches - interior


1 Interior lights and warning light for
front passenger airbag deactivation
⇒ “1.1 Removing and installing the front interior light”, page 201
⇒ “1.2 Removing and installing the rear interior light”, page 202
⇒ “1.3 Removing and installing the rear interior light on the left
and right”, page 203
⇒ “1.4 Removing and installing glove box light”, page 203
⇒ “1.5 Removing and installing the light for the storage bag in the
front door trim”, page 204
⇒ “1.6 Removing and installing the front footwell light”,
page 204
⇒ “1.7 Removing and installing the centre console glove com‐
partment light”, page 205
⇒ “1.8 Removing and installing luggage compartment light”, page
206
⇒ “1.9 Removing and installing the warning light for front passen‐
ger airbag switch-off function”, page 206

1.1 Removing and installing the front interior


light
Removing
– Switch off the ignition and all electrical consumers!
– Carefully lower light scattering cover -arrow- and remove.

1. Interior lights and warning light for front passenger airbag deactivation 201
Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 02.2018

– Release two screws -1-.


– Remove the interior light downwards and disconnect the con‐
nectors.

Note

It is necessary to not remove the interior light to replace the light


bulb.

– Light bulb -2- without base W5W.


– Light bulb -3- Soffitte C10W.
Installing
Installation is carried out in the reverse order.
Tightening torques
Fixing screws for interior light 2 Nm

1.2 Removing and installing the rear interior


light
Removing

Caution

When using the lever tool, mask points where the lever tool is
applied using commercially available adhesive tape.

– Switch off the ignition and all electrical consumers!


– Carefully lever out the interior light -1- from the opening in the
moulded headliner -arrow- using the removal wedge - 3409- .
– Disconnect plug.

– Remove the light bulb -1- if necessary -2- (Soffitte C6W or


C5W) from the clamping sleeve and replace it.
Installing
– Mount the plug and clip the lamp back into the assembly open‐
ing.

202 Rep. gr.96 - Lights, bulbs, switches - interior


Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 02.2018

1.3 Removing and installing the rear interior


light on the left and right
Removing

Caution

When using the lever tool, mask points where the lever tool is
applied using commercially available adhesive tape.

– Switch off the ignition and all electrical consumers!


– Carefully release the catch -arrow- with a small cross-head
screwdriver, tilt out the interior light and remove.
– Disconnect plug.

– Push out lens -arrow- and replace light bulb (C5W).


Installing
Installation is carried out in the reverse order.

1.4 Removing and installing glove box light


Removing

Caution

When using the lever tool, mask points where the lever tool is
applied using commercially available adhesive tape.

– Switch off the ignition and all electrical consumers!

1. Interior lights and warning light for front passenger airbag deactivation 203
Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 02.2018

– Place a cross-head screwdriver under the light scattering cov‐


er -arrow- and carefully lever out the lamp.
– Disconnect the plug connection.
– Remove the light bulb W5W and replace it.
Installing
Installation is carried out in the reverse order.

1.5 Removing and installing the light for the


storage bag in the front door trim

Note

The lighting is fitted with LEDs, which cannot be replaced sepa‐


rately.

Removing

Caution

When using the lever tool, mask points where the lever tool is
applied using commercially available adhesive tape.

– Switch off the ignition and all electrical consumers!


– Place a cross-head screwdriver under the lens and carefully
loosen light -1- from the clips -arrows- and remove it.
– Disconnect plug.
Installing
Installation is carried out in the reverse order.

1.6 Removing and installing the front foot‐


well light

Note

♦ When removing and installing the footwell lighting on the front


passenger side, the work procedure is identical to the one on
the driver side.
♦ The lighting is fitted with LEDs, which cannot be replaced sep‐
arately.

204 Rep. gr.96 - Lights, bulbs, switches - interior


Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 02.2018

Removing

Caution

When using the lever tool, mask points where the lever tool is
applied using commercially available adhesive tape.

– Switch off the ignition and all electrical consumers!


– Press the latch -1- with a slotted screwdriver in area of the
arrow -A- and carefully release the lamp -2-.
– Disconnect the plug connection.
Installing
Installation is carried out in the reverse order.

1.7 Removing and installing the centre con‐


sole glove compartment light

Note

The lighting is fitted with LEDs, which cannot be replaced sepa‐


rately.

Removing

Caution

When using the lever tool, mask points where the lever tool is
applied using commercially available adhesive tape.

– Switch off the ignition and all electrical consumers!


– Lever off the cover -1- using the disassembly wedge - 3409-
-arrow-.

1. Interior lights and warning light for front passenger airbag deactivation 205
Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 02.2018

– Loosen light -1- from the clips -arrows- and remove it.
Installing
Installation is carried out in the reverse order.

1.8 Removing and installing luggage com‐


partment light
Removing

Caution

When using the lever tool, mask points where the lever tool is
applied using commercially available adhesive tape.

– Switch off the ignition and all electrical consumers!


– Place a cross-head screwdriver under the lens and carefully
lever out the light.
– Disconnect the plug connection.
– Remove the light bulb W5W and replace it.
Installing
Installation is carried out in the reverse order.

1.9 Removing and installing the warning


light for front passenger airbag switch-
off function
Removing
– Switch off the ignition and all electrical consumers!
– Remove centre vent -2- ⇒ Heating, Air Conditioning; Rep. gr.
80 .
– Disconnect plug connection -3-.
– Press the warning light with the warning light switch -1- out of
the centre vents towards the outside -arrow-.
Installing
Installation is carried out in the reverse order.

206 Rep. gr.96 - Lights, bulbs, switches - interior


Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 02.2018

2 Switches on the dash panel, in the


centre console, in the doors and in
the roof cover
⇒ “2.1 Removing and installing light switch”, page 207
⇒ “2.2 Removing and installing the headlight range control ad‐
juster”, page 207
⇒ “2.3 Removing and installing the switch for daylight driving
light”, page 208
⇒ “2.4 Removing and installing switches in centre console of the
dash panel”, page 208
⇒ “2.5 Removing and installing the glove box light switch ”, page
209
⇒ “2.6 Removing and installing hazard warning lights button”,
page 209
⇒ “2.7 Removing and installing the mirror adjustment switch”,
page 210
⇒ “2.8 Removing and installing the switch for the power window
lifter”, page 210
⇒ “2.9 Removing and installing starter button E408 ”, page 211
⇒ “2.10 Removing and installing the interior monitoring deactiva‐
tion button as well as the towing protection”, page 212
⇒ “2.11 Removing an installing the push-button for tyre pressure
inspection”, page 212
⇒ “2.12 Removing and installing the rear seat heating switch”,
page 212

2.1 Removing and installing light switch


Removing
– Switch off the ignition and all electrical consumers!
– Turn the turning handle of the light switch to position “0”.
– Press in the handle of the light switch firmly in direction of ar‐
row -1- and turn to the right in direction of arrow -2-.
– Hold the turning handle of the light switch in this position and
pull the light switch out towards you in direction of arrow -3-.
– Disconnect connector at switch.
Installing
– Turn the turning handle of the light switch to position “0”.
– Mount plug.
– Carefully push the light switch into the assembly opening until
it audibly locks into place.

2.2 Removing and installing the headlight


range control adjuster
Removing
– Switch off the ignition and all electrical consumers!
– Remove the air flow vent from the dash panel on the driver's
side ⇒ Heating, Air Conditioning; Rep. gr. 80 .

2. Switches on the dash panel, in the centre console, in the doors and in the roof cover 207
Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 02.2018

– Put hand through the assembly opening for the air flow vent,
press together the retaining tabs -arrows- and remove the ad‐
juster -A- with installation from the mounting frame.
– Disconnect plug.
Installing
Installation is carried out in the reverse order.

2.3 Removing and installing the switch for


daylight driving light
Removing
– Switch off the ignition and all electrical consumers!
– Remove the damping trim panel below the dash panel.
– Remove the cover for the fuse carrier below the steering wheel
-arrow-.

– Unclip the switch for the daylight driving light using a small
screwdriver -2- -1- and press out to the inside of the dash
panel.
– Disconnect plug.
Installing
– Mount plug.
– Push the switch into the assembly opening until it audibly locks
into place -1-.

2.4 Removing and installing switches in


centre console of the dash panel

Note

The switches cannot be exchanged separately. In the event of a


fault, replace the complete switch unit.

208 Rep. gr.96 - Lights, bulbs, switches - interior


Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 02.2018

Removing

Caution

When using the lever tool, mask points where the lever tool is
applied using commercially available adhesive tape.

– Switch off the ignition and all electrical consumers!


– Lever off the cover -1- at the front using the removal wedge -
3409- -arrow- and remove.

– Remove heating control or air conditioning system control ⇒


Heating, Air Conditioning; Rep. gr. 80 or ⇒ Heating, Air Con‐
ditioning; Rep. gr. 87 ; -Pos. 2- .
– Push the switch unit -1- out of the dash panel from behind
-arrow-.
– Disconnect the plug connections.
Installing
Installation is carried out in the reverse order.

2.5 Removing and installing the glove box


light switch
Removing
– Switch off the ignition and all electrical consumers!
– Remove storage compartment on passenger side ⇒ Body
Work; Rep. gr. 70 .
– Pull out the bolt -3-.
– Turn stop mechanism -1- by approx. 45° -arrow- and remove.
– If necessary, release the switch -2- from the catch and remove.
Installing
Installation is performed in the reverse order, pay attention to the
following points:
– Perform a functional test.

2.6 Removing and installing hazard warning


lights button
Removing
– Switch off the ignition and all electrical consumers!

2. Switches on the dash panel, in the centre console, in the doors and in the roof cover 209
Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 02.2018

– Remove centre vent -2- ⇒ Heating, Air Conditioning; Rep. gr.


80 .
– Disconnect the plug connection at switch -3-.
– Press the hazard warning light switch with warning light for
airbag switch-off -1- out of the centre vents towards the outside
-arrow-.
Installing
Installation is carried out in the reverse order.

2.7 Removing and installing the mirror ad‐


justment switch
Removing
– Switch off the ignition and all electrical consumers!
– Removing driver door trim panel ⇒ Body Work; Rep. gr. 70 .
– Unplug connector and release switch with a small screwdriver
-arrows-.
– Take out switch.
Installing
Installation is carried out in the reverse order.

2.8 Removing and installing the switch for


the power window lifter

Note

The removal procedure is identical for all types of switches for


power windows.

Removing

Caution

When using the lever tool, mask points where the lever tool is
applied using commercially available adhesive tape.

– Switch off the ignition and all electrical consumers!

210 Rep. gr.96 - Lights, bulbs, switches - interior


Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 02.2018

– Slightly raise the switch carrier -1- at the front -arrow- using
the removal wedge - 3409- and remove.
– Disconnect plug.
– Furthermore the operating switch can be removed by releas‐
ing with a small screwdriver and pushing out of the holder
-1-.

2.9 Removing and installing starter button -


E408-
The button is inserted in the immobilizer reading coil.
The reader coil provides emergency start capability, see ⇒ Rapid
Owner's Manual .
Removing
– Disconnect battery earth strap
⇒ “1.3 Disconnecting and reconnecting battery”, page 10 .
– Remove the steering wheel ⇒ Chassis; Rep. gr. 48 .

Note

Before the steering wheel is removed from the shaft, the front
wheels must be brought into the straight ahead position.

– Removing top and bottom steering column trim ⇒ Body Work;


Rep. gr. 68 .
– Disconnect the plug from the button -1- and from the reader
coil -2-.
– Insert two small cross-head screwdrivers (e.g watch-and-
clock screwdrivers) into the openings -arrows- and press the
sheet pegs.
– Grip the bottom part of the button -1- and press it towards the
outside from the bottom trim panel for steering column.
– When removing the reader coil -2-, start by removing the but‐
ton, then carefully unclip the reader coil with the removal
wedge - 3409- .
Installing
– If removed, first of all insert the immobiliser reader coil -2- and
lock in place.
– Then insert the button -1- into the bottom trim panel and press
until the interlocking lugs lock into place.
– Mount plug and install the bottom and top steering column trim
panel.

2. Switches on the dash panel, in the centre console, in the doors and in the roof cover 211
Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 02.2018

2.10 Removing and installing the interior


monitoring deactivation button as well
as the towing protection
Removing
– Switch off the ignition and all electrical consumers!
– Remove bottom trim panel of pillar A on front passenger side
-1- ⇒ Body Work; Rep. gr. 70 .
– Disconnect connector at switch.
– Press together the lateral retaining tabs and remove the button
-2-.
Installing
Installation is carried out in the reverse order.

2.11 Removing an installing the push-button


for tyre pressure inspection
Descriptions of functions and additional information ⇒ Operating
Instruction Rapid .
Removing

Caution

When using the lever tool, mask points where the lever tool is
applied using commercially available adhesive tape.

– Switch off the ignition and all electrical consumers!


– Apply handbrake.
– Using a removal wedge - 3409- or screwdriver, carefully lever
out the switch -1- from the centre console -arrow-.
– Disconnect plug.
Installing
Installation is carried out in the reverse order.

2.12 Removing and installing the rear seat


heating switch
Removing
– Switch off the ignition and all electrical consumers!

212 Rep. gr.96 - Lights, bulbs, switches - interior


Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 02.2018

Caution

When using the lever tool, mask points where the lever tool is
applied using commercially available adhesive tape.

– Use disassembly wedge - 3409- to unclip the cover -3- to‐


gether with the switches -2- from the trim of the armrest -1-..
– Remove cover -3-, taking into account the lengths of attached
wires.
– Unlock and disconnect plugs of switches -2-.
– Push switches -2- from behind arrow out of the cover -3-.
Installing
Installation is carried out in the reverse order.

2. Switches on the dash panel, in the centre console, in the doors and in the roof cover 213
Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 02.2018

3 Horn
⇒ “3.1 Removing and installing horn”, page 214

3.1 Removing and installing horn


Removing
– Switch off the ignition and all electrical consumers!
– Remove noise insulation and front part of left wheelhouse liner
⇒ Body Work; Rep. gr. 66 .
– Unscrew bolt -1-.
– Remove horn or horns, downwards.
– Disconnect the plug connections -arrows-.
– Remove the horns from the holders - unscrew screw -2-.
– If necessary, release the nuts -3- and remove the holder for
the horn.
Installing
Installation is carried out in the reverse order.
Tightening torques
Fixing screw for mounting bracket and 20 Nm
horns, Pos. -1- and -2-
Nut, Pos. -3- 12 Nm

214 Rep. gr.96 - Lights, bulbs, switches - interior


Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 02.2018

4 Anti-theft warning system


⇒ “4.1 General description”, page 215
⇒ “4.2 Removing and installing the horn H12 ”, page 215
⇒ “4.3 Removing and installing interior monitoring sensor G273
and vehicle inclination sender G384 ”, page 216
⇒ “4.4 Removing and installing the interior monitoring deactiva‐
tion button”, page 216

4.1 General description


♦ Descriptions of functions and additional information ⇒ Oper‐
ating Instruction Rapid .
♦ The functions of the anti-theft warning system are integrated
in the onboard supply control unit - J519- .
♦ After starting the anti-theft warning system, the alarm source
which is stored in the onboard supply control unit - J519- is
output.
♦ The anti-theft warning system is equipped with self-diagnosis,
which facilitates the fault finding.
♦ For fault finding use ⇒ Vehicle diagnostic tester.

4.2 Removing and installing the horn - H12-

Note

The horn - H12- has an emergency battery which cannot be re‐


placed as a separate item.

Removing
– Switch off the ignition and all electrical consumers!
– Remove the plenum chamber cover ⇒ Body Work; Rep. gr.
66 .
– Remove bulkhead ⇒ Body work; Rep. gr. 50 .
– Disconnect plug connection -2-.
– Bore out fastening rivets -arrows- and remove alarm horn
-1-.
– f necessary unscrew nut and remove alarm horn from holder.
Installing

Note

♦ Remove all the drillings.


♦ Any damage to the paintwork must be repaired immediately
by a specialist.

– Secure the alarm horn with new rivets.


– Further installation occurs in reverse order.

4. Anti-theft warning system 215


Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 02.2018

4.3 Removing and installing interior moni‐


toring sensor - G273- and vehicle incli‐
nation sender - G384-
Removing
– Switch off the ignition and all electrical consumers!
– Removing the spectacle storage area from the headliner -2-
⇒ Body Work; Rep. gr. 68 .
– Disconnect plug.
– Completely release sensors -1- from the catches -arrows- and
take out.
Installing
Installation is performed in the reverse order, pay attention to the
following points:
– After replacing the sender, you must carry out an adjustment
(parametrisation) with ⇒ Vehicle diagnostic tester.

4.4 Removing and installing the interior


monitoring deactivation button
Remove and install the interior monitoring deactivation button
⇒ “2.10 Removing and installing the interior monitoring deactiva‐
tion button as well as the towing protection”, page 212 .

216 Rep. gr.96 - Lights, bulbs, switches - interior


Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 02.2018

5 12V power sockets, cigarette lighter


All the notes and comments for this chapter can be found in the
Workshop Manual ⇒ Electrical System - General notes; Rep. gr.
96 . If a note cannot be accessed, open the Workshop Manual
“Electrical System - General Notes” manually in “ELSA”, Section
“96”.

5. 12V power sockets, cigarette lighter 217


Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 02.2018

6 Immobiliser
⇒ “6.1 General description”, page 218
⇒ “6.2 Immobiliser control unit J362 ”, page 219
⇒ “6.3 Ignition key”, page 219
⇒ “6.4 New identity when changing all the components”,
page 220
⇒ “6.5 System test result (online connection)”, page 220

6.1 General description


Immobiliser of the fourth generation with on-line connection and
Download.
An essential component part of the immobiliser of the fourth gen‐
eration is a central database, in which all theft-related data of the
control units involved are stored. It is not possible to adapt the
immobiliser control units without online connection to this data‐
base.
♦ A PIN code request of the immobiliser components by fax or
temporary activation of the components is not possible.
♦ All components associated with the immobiliser must be adap‐
ted online.
♦ All - even re-ordered - ignition keys are already precoded at
the factory for a specific vehicle and can only be initialised for
this vehicle.
♦ When re-ordering ignition keys, the relevant vehicle identifi‐
cation number (VIN code) must be provided.
♦ In Škoda vehicles it is no longer possible to adapt the compo‐
nents of other corporate brands.
Other information:
⇒ Self-study programme No. 87 ; Immobilisers in Škoda vehicles
Immobiliser components:
♦ Immobiliser control unit - J362-
⇒ “6.2 Immobiliser control unit J362 ”, page 219
♦ Engine control unit - J623- diesel engines ⇒ Engine; Rep. gr.
23 , or petrol engines ⇒ Engine; Rep. gr. 24
♦ Ignition key ⇒ “6.3 Ignition key”, page 219
New identity when changing all the immobiliser components
⇒ “6.4 New identity when changing all the components”,
page 220 .
Functions of the immobiliser control unit - J362- :
♦ Communication between all the immobiliser components
♦ Encryption of data between the control units involved
Fault recognition and fault display
The immobiliser is equipped with self-diagnosis, which facilitates
the fault finding.
For fault finding, use the ⇒ Vehicle diagnostic tester in the mode
“Targeted fault finding”.

218 Rep. gr.96 - Lights, bulbs, switches - interior


Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 02.2018

6.2 Immobiliser control unit - J362-


The immobiliser control unit - J362- is integrated in the dash panel
insert. If the control unit is defective, the complete dash panel
insert must be replaced.
Adapt immobiliser control unit - J362-
– Connect the ⇒ Vehicle diagnostic tester.
– In the ⇒ Vehicle diagnostic tester, select the operating mode
“Targeted fault-finding”.
– Select the “Selected Functions/Components” and subse‐
quently the following menu points using the button “Skip”:
♦ Body
♦ Electrical system
♦ 01 – Self-diagnosable systems
♦ Immobiliser
♦ Operation
♦ Adjust dash panel insert

6.3 Ignition key


All - even re-ordered - ignition keys are already precoded at the
factory for a specific vehicle and can only be adapted to this ve‐
hicle. When re-ordering ignition keys, the relevant vehicle identi‐
fication number (VIN code) must be provided and subsequently
the new keys must be adapted to the immobiliser control unit -
J362- .

Note

Before replacing the lock set or the control units, the function
“New identity when changing all the components” must be re‐
trieved.

Adapting and checking the ignition key

Note

If new or additional ignition keys are required, they must be adap‐


ted to the immobiliser control unit.

Adapt the ignition key to the immobiliser control unit - J362- or


check:
– Connect the ⇒ Vehicle diagnostic tester.
– In the ⇒ Vehicle diagnostic tester, select the operating mode
“Targeted fault-finding”.
– Select the “Selected Functions/Components” and subse‐
quently the following menu points using the button “Skip”:
♦ Body
♦ Electrical system
♦ 01 – Self-diagnosable systems
♦ Immobiliser
♦ Operation

6. Immobiliser 219
Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 02.2018

♦ Adapt and check the ignition key


Remove and install the battery for the radio control key ⇒ Body
Work - Assembly work; Rep. gr. 57 .
Remove and install the radio container (transmitter unit for the
radio controlled central locking system) of the ignition key ⇒ Body
Work; Rep. gr. 57 .

Note

If the radio container is exchanged additionally, it must also be


adapted with the ⇒ Vehicle diagnostic tester to the convenience
system.

6.4 New identity when changing all the com‐


ponents
All necessary steps required for the new installation of all the im‐
mobiliser components are carried out with this programme.
– Connect the ⇒ Vehicle diagnostic tester.
– In the ⇒ Vehicle diagnostic tester, select the operating mode
“Targeted fault-finding”.
– Select the “Selected Functions/Components” and subse‐
quently the following menu points using the button “Skip”:
♦ Body
♦ Electrical system
♦ 01 – Self-diagnosable systems
♦ Immobiliser
♦ Operation
♦ New identity

6.5 System test result (online connection)


The following steps are carried out with this test programme:
♦ System test for the online connection
♦ Verification of user authorisation
♦ Test the correct cable connection to the Škoda database
The precondition for this is the online connection (network con‐
nection) of the tester.
– Connect the ⇒ Vehicle diagnostic tester.
– In the ⇒ Vehicle diagnostic tester, select the operating mode
“Targeted fault-finding”.
– Select the “Selected Functions/Components” and subse‐
quently the following menu points using the button “Skip”:
♦ Body
♦ Electrical system
♦ 01 – Self-diagnosable systems
♦ Immobiliser
♦ Operation
♦ Online system test

220 Rep. gr.96 - Lights, bulbs, switches - interior


Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 02.2018

97 – Wiring
1 Fuse holder and relay carrier
⇒ “1.1 Removing and installing fuse holder from dash panel”,
page 221
⇒ “1.2 Removing and installing the E-box in engine compartment”,
page 222
⇒ “1.3 Removing and installing relay and fuse holder behind dash
panel on the driver's side”, page 225
⇒ “1.4 Removing and installing the relay of the relay carrier”, page
226

1.1 Removing and installing fuse holder


from dash panel

Note

Exact assignment of connections at fuse holder and relay carrier


can be found in ⇒ Current flow diagrams, Electrical fault finding
and Fitting locations.

Removing
– Disconnect battery earth strap
⇒ “1.3 Disconnecting and reconnecting battery”, page 10 .
– Remove the damper below the dash panel on the driver side
⇒ Body Work; Rep. gr. 70 .
– Open cover of fuse holder -arrow- and remove.

– Unscrew the screws -arrows- and unhook the fuse holder


downwards.
Installing
Installation is performed in the reverse order, pay attention to the
following points:
– Pay attention to the work sequence when re-connecting the
battery
⇒ “1.3 Disconnecting and reconnecting battery”, page 10 .
Tightening torques
Fixing screws for fuse holder 2.5 Nm

1. Fuse holder and relay carrier 221


Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 02.2018

1.2 Removing and installing the E-box in en‐


gine compartment
⇒ “1.2.1 Removing and installing the E-box in engine compart‐
ment up to CW 21.2015”, page 222
⇒ “1.2.2 Removing and installing the E-box in engine compart‐
ment as of CW 22.2015”, page 223

1.2.1 Removing and installing the E-box in en‐


gine compartment up to CW 21.2015
Removing
– Switch off the ignition and all electrical consumers!
– Vehicles with TDI engines - unlock and remove the retaining
tab in direction of arrow -A- with a screwdriver and slide the
automatic glow period control unit - J179- Pos. -1- off the sup‐
port -2- in direction of arrow -B-.
– Disconnect plug.
– Disconnect the battery earth strap -4-
⇒ “1.3 Disconnecting and reconnecting battery”, page 10 .

– Fold open the cover -3- and slacken the nut of the positive
terminal -2-.
– Slightly press down the catches one after the other using a
screwdriver, then release by tilting the screwdriver in direction
of arrow -A- and fold the fuse box with the positive terminal
-1- to the side in direction of arrow -B-.

222 Rep. gr.97 - Wiring


Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 02.2018

– Successively detach the cover -1- from the catches -2- using
a screwdriver, in direction of arrow -A-.
– Swivel out the cover in direction of arrow -B- and remove.
– Unscrew the fixing nuts for the connection cables and remove
the fuse box.
Installing
Installation is carried out in the reverse order.
Tightening torques
Fixing nuts for connection cable M 6 6 Nm
Fixing nuts for connection cable M 5 4.5 Nm

1.2.2 Removing and installing the E-box in en‐


gine compartment as of CW 22.2015
Removing
– Disconnect ground strap from the battery
⇒ “1.3 Disconnecting and reconnecting battery”, page 10 .
Vehicles with TDI engine:
– Press off catch peg -arrow- and automatic glow period control
unit - J179- Pos. -1- upwards out of the e-box.
Continued for all vehicles

– Disconnect the cable ties -arrows- on the electric cables at the


holder -1-.

1. Fuse holder and relay carrier 223


Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 02.2018

– Press off catch in -direction of arrow- and remove housing


cover -1- at holder -2-.

– Mark the position of the electric cables -1-.

Note

♦ The exact connection assignment of electric cables can be


taken from the valid current flow diagram, see ⇒ Current flow
diagrams, Electrical fault finding and Fitting locations.
♦ Where necessary, photos should be taken of the connection
assignment.

– Unscrew nuts -1- and screw -2- and remove electric cables.

– Press off latches -arrow- and remove the E-Box -2- from the
mounting bracket -1-.
– Mark the position and then disconnect the electrical connec‐
tors and lines underneath the e-box.

Note

♦ The exact connection assignment of electric cables can be


taken from the valid current flow diagram, see ⇒ Current flow
diagrams, Electrical fault finding and Fitting locations.
♦ Where necessary, take photos of the electrical cables.

– When removing the e-box mounting bracket - undo screw


-arrow- in the left wheel arch.

224 Rep. gr.97 - Wiring


Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 02.2018

– Undo the latch -arrow- and remove mounting bracket -1- from
the bodyshell by moving it upwards.
Installing
Installation is performed in the reverse order, pay attention to the
following points:
– Latch the e-box mounting bracket on to the bodyshell, e-box
in the mounting bracket and e-box housing cover.
– Connecting battery
⇒ “1.3 Disconnecting and reconnecting battery”, page 10 .
Tightening torques
M6 nuts of the electric cables to 6 Nm
the e-box
M8 screw of the electric cables 6 Nm
to the E-box
Screw for holder in left wheel 2 Nm
arch

1.3 Removing and installing relay and fuse


holder behind dash panel on the driver's
side
Removing
– Disconnect battery earth strap
⇒ “1.3 Disconnecting and reconnecting battery”, page 10 .
– Removing the dash panel ⇒ Body Work; Rep. gr. 70 .
– Remove onboard supply control unit - J519-
⇒ “2.1.2 Removing and installing the vehicle voltage control
unit J519 ”, page 228 .
– Take all relays -1- from the relay carrier -2-.

Note

♦ The number of relays depends on the vehicle equipment.


♦ The exact relay position assignment and relay ⇒ Current flow
diagrams, Electrical fault finding and Fitting locations.
♦ Where necessary, take photos of the relay position assign‐
ment and relay.

– Unlock the catches -arrows- in sequence and remove the con‐


nectors -1- from the relay carrier -2-.

Volkswagen Technical Site: http://vwts.ru http://vwts.info

1. Fuse holder and relay carrier 225


Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 02.2018

– Disconnect the cable ties -arrows- and slacken the thread


-2-.
– Unscrew screws -3- and remove relay carrier -1-.
Installing
Installation is performed in the reverse order, pay attention to the
following points:
– Insert all connectors into the relay carrier until they engage.
– Secure the electrical cables with cable ties.
– Connecting battery
⇒ “1.3 Disconnecting and reconnecting battery”, page 10 .
Tightening torques
Fixing screws for relay and fuse carrier, 4.5 Nm
Pos. -3-

1.4 Removing and installing the relay of the


relay carrier
Removing
– Switch off the ignition and all electrical consumers!
– Remove the damper below the dash panel on the driver side
⇒ Body Work; Rep. gr. 70 .
– Slacken fuse holder -1- from the dash panel and unhook
downwards
⇒ “1.1 Removing and installing fuse holder from dash panel”,
page 221 .
– The dash panel side trim panel ⇒ Body Work; Rep. gr. 70 if
necessary light switch -2-
⇒ “2.1 Removing and installing light switch”, page 207 and air
flow vent on the driver's side can be removed for the purposes
of clear presentation of the assignment of the individual relays
⇒ Heating, Air Conditioning; Rep. gr. 80 .
– Put the hand behind the dash panel -arrow- and take the cor‐
responding relay if necessary the fuse out of the relay carrier
-3-.
Installing
Installation is carried out in the reverse order.

Note

The number of relays depends on the vehicle equipment.

226 Rep. gr.97 - Wiring


Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 02.2018

2 Control units
⇒ “2.1 Onboard supply control unit J519 ”, page 227
⇒ “2.2 Removing and installing data bus diagnostic interface J533
”, page 229

2.1 Onboard supply control unit - J519-


⇒ “2.1.1 General description”, page 227
⇒ “2.1.2 Removing and installing the vehicle voltage control unit
J519 ”, page 228

2.1.1 General description


The vehicle voltage control unit - J519- depending on the vehicle
equipment in the vehicle has the following tasks:
♦ Central locking control
♦ Anti-theft warning system control
♦ Tailgate lock
♦ Signal reception of remote control
♦ Position display of the central locking system
♦ Operating terminal 30
♦ Load management intervention
♦ Interior lighting control
♦ Pre-activation of the fuel pump
♦ Actuation of the windscreen wiper, windscreen washer system
and periodic wiping
♦ Exterior mirror and rear window heater
♦ Turn signal light and warning light control
♦ Brake light operation
♦ Horn
♦ Cruise control system (signal conversion to the CAN databus
of the drive system)
♦ Remote release of the tailgate
♦ Switch and instrument lighting
♦ Starter interlock
♦ Rear fog light and reversing light control (not on all equipment)
♦ switches off the electrical consumers at low voltage (load
management)
♦ Data bus diagnostic interface - J533-
The onboard supply control unit - J519- is equipped with self-di‐
agnosis, which facilitates fault finding.
For fault finding use ⇒ Vehicle diagnostic tester.

2. Control units 227


Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 02.2018

2.1.2 Removing and installing the vehicle volt‐


age control unit - J519-

Note

♦ When replacing the vehicle voltage control unit - J519- with


integrated data bus diagnostic interface - J533- , the ⇒ Vehicle
diagnostic tester must be connected before removing the con‐
trol unit and the function “Replace control unit” must be selec‐
ted in the operating mode “Targeted fault finding”. Then code
the new control unit after the installation see ⇒ Vehicle diag‐
nostic tester.
♦ The control unit can also be coded via an On-line connection.
In this case, the ⇒ Vehicle diagnostic tester must be connected
before removing the control unit from the vehicle.
♦ The connectors can only be connected in one position, they
must not be mixed up.

Removing
The control unit is located below the dash panel on the driver side
and behind the relay carrier.
– Disconnect battery earth strap
⇒ “1.3 Disconnecting and reconnecting battery”, page 10 .
– If present, remove the damping below the dash panel on the
driver side ⇒ Body Work; Rep. gr. 70 .
– Remove “A” pillar trim, bottom left ⇒ Body Work; Rep. gr. 70 .
Vehicles manufactured up to CW 21.2015:
– Unlock and disconnect the plug connections -3- by tilting out
the clamps -2-.
– Detach the control unit -1- from the support by releasing the
latches in direction of arrow -A-.
– Swivel out the control unit in direction of arrow -B- and remove.
Vehicles manufactured as of CW 22.2015:

– Press the catch -1- and tilt out release lever for connectors in
sequence in -direction of arrow-.

228 Rep. gr.97 - Wiring


Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 02.2018

– Disconnect plug connection -1-.


– Press of the catches in -direction of arrow-, tilt the unit -2- out
of the mounting bracket -3- and remove downwards.
Installing
Installation is performed in the reverse order, pay attention to the
following points:
– Insert the control unit and correctly lock into the holder.
– Pay attention to the work sequence when re-connecting the
battery
⇒ “1.3 Disconnecting and reconnecting battery”, page 10 .

2.2 Removing and installing data bus diag‐


nostic interface - J533-

Note

♦ The diagnostics Interface for Databus - J533- is integrated in


the onboard control unit - J519- and cannot be removed sep‐
arately.
♦ In the event of an error, the onboard control unit - J519- must
be replaced.

Removing and installing onboard supply control unit - J519-


⇒ “2.1.2 Removing and installing the vehicle voltage control unit
J519 ”, page 228

2. Control units 229


Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 02.2018

3 Vehicle diagnosis, testing and infor‐


mation systems
For the following descriptions, see Workshop Manual ⇒ Electrical
System – General notes; Rep. gr. 97 . If a note cannot be ac‐
cessed, open the Workshop Manual “Electrical System - General
Notes” manually in “ELSA”, Section “97”.
♦ Use and safety instructions.
♦ Connect ⇒ Vehicle diagnostic tester.

230 Rep. gr.97 - Wiring


Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 02.2018

4 Wiring harness and plug repair


All the notes and comments for the following chapters can be
found in the Workshop Manual ⇒ Electrical System - General
notes; Rep. gr. 97 If a note cannot be accessed, open the Work‐
shop Manual “Electrical System - General Notes” manually in
“ELSA”, Section “97”.
♦ General instructions for the repair on the vehicle electrics
♦ General instructions for wiring harness and plug repair
♦ Repair of airbag and belt tensioner cables
♦ Repair of CAN bus lines

4. Wiring harness and plug repair 231


Rapid NH 2013 ➤ , Rapid NH 2014 ➤
Electrical system - Edition 02.2018

5 Use contact surface cleaning set -


VAS 6410-
All the notes and comments for the following chapters can be
found in the Workshop Manual ⇒ Electrical System - General
notes; Rep. gr. 97 If a note cannot be accessed, open the Work‐
shop Manual “Electrical System - General Notes” manually in
“ELSA”, Section “97”.
♦ Repairing the cable eyes
♦ Repairing screwed connections
♦ Cleaning the battery pole terminals and battery poles
♦ Preserving

232 Rep. gr.97 - Wiring

You might also like